JP7295901B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a big win lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole, and when a big win is won by this big win lottery, a big win game is executed in which the big win hole is opened. . Patent Documents 1 and 2 propose a gaming machine in which a non-electrically operated area is provided in a variable starting opening called an electric chew, and the non-electrical winning opening is opened by a game ball entering the variable starting opening. there is

JP 2014-121399 A JP 2017-86699 A

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that informs a player of the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into each winning opening including a big winning opening during a big winning game. Such a gaming machine has a problem that, when game balls more than expected are not paid out, the player feels a sense of loss and the interest in the game decreases.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a game board in which a game area in which game balls flow down is formed, a first winning area provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter, 2 winning areas and a third winning area, and a first number of game balls are paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning area, and the entry of the game ball into the second winning area. payout control means for paying out a second number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls into the third winning area, and paying out a third number of game balls based on the entry of the game balls into the first winning area; The first stored value is updated by the first number based on the entry of the game ball, and the second stored value is updated by the second number based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning area. Then, based on the entry of the game ball into the third winning area, the second stored value is updated by the number obtained by adding a specific number within the range of the first stored value to the third number. and an informing means for informing the number of game balls to be paid out based on the second stored value.

Further, the updating means may subtract the specific number from the first stored value when updating the second stored value based on the entry of the game ball into the third winning area.

In addition, there are a predetermined game that allows game balls to enter the first winning area and the second winning area, and a specific game that allows game balls to enter at least the third winning area. The specific game may be started after the predetermined game is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in a game.

FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the gaming machine showing a state in which the door according to the simultaneous turning reference example is opened; It is a front view of the gaming machine according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a figure explaining the 2nd big prize-winning hole based on the simultaneous spinning reference example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the simultaneous spinning reference example; It is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table and a small winning symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a variation time determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state and variation time based on a simultaneous spinning reference example. FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a special electric accessary product operating ramset table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; It is a second diagram for explaining the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table based on the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous turning reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to a simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game property based on the simultaneous spinning reference example. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not properly played according to the simultaneous spinning reference example; It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag based on the simultaneous turning reference example. It is the 1st flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining subcommand group set processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a power-off saving process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining setting-related processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining switch management processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; It is a flowchart explaining the gate passage process in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining first starting opening passage processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd starting opening passage process in the main-control board|substrate based on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart for explaining effect determination processing at the time of acquisition in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening passage processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a special game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special game management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the special symbol variation processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is the 1st flowchart explaining the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous turning reference example. It is the second flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flowchart for explaining a special symbol hit determination process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol variation number determination processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining a number cutting management process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation during processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the symbol forced stop processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening pre-opening processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening opening control process in the main control board according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening end wait process in the main control board according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a normal game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal game management processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize opening pre-opening processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening opening and closing switching processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening control processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait processing in the main control board according to the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the no reach variation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation production|presentation of the normal reach fluctuation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the developed reach variation pattern at the time of loss based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big hit based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of a variable production|presentation in case the ready-to-reach development production|presentation based on a production|presentation reference example is performed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the pseudo continuous ready-to-reach fluctuation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variable production|presentation determination table based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the pending|holding display production|presentation based on the production|presentation reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a final pending display pattern determination table according to a reference example of production, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a immediately previous pending display pattern determination table according to a reference example of production. It is a flowchart explaining the sub CPU initialization process in the sub control board which concerns on the production|presentation reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the sub-timer interrupt processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead designation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the variation pattern command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment; FIG. It is a partially enlarged view of the second game area. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of a big prize-winning hole. It is a figure explaining a 1st non-electrical prize winning device and a 2nd non-electrical prize winning device. FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining the operation of the first non-electrical winning device and the second non-electrical winning device; It is a second diagram for explaining the operation of the first non-electrical winning device and the second non-electrical winning device. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the hit design random number determination table which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the special electric accessory operation ram set table which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing aspect of a special prize mouth, and the opening-and-closing aspect of the probability variable area|region by a movable member. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table which concerns on an Example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol variation time data table according to the embodiment, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game state which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game nature based on an Example. It is a timing chart of a 10R probability variable big role game and a non-electrical bonus period according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in the main control board according to the embodiment; 6 is a flowchart for explaining switch management processing in the main control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart explaining the probability variable area passage processing in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a number cutting management process in the main control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening end wait process in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening opening and closing switching processing in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the payout control management process in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a figure explaining a 1st production|presentation system|strain. It is a figure explaining an example of the content of the production|presentation of a 1st production|presentation system|strain. It is a figure explaining the update method of a counter. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another example of the content of the effects of the first effect system; It is a figure explaining a 2nd production|presentation system|strain. It is a figure explaining an example of the content of the production|presentation of a 2nd production|presentation system|strain. It is a figure explaining an example of special fluctuation|variation production|presentation. (a) is a diagram for explaining a third effect system, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a fourth effect system. It is a figure explaining an example of the content of the production|presentation of a 3rd production|presentation system|strain. It is a figure explaining an example of the content of the production|presentation of a 4th production|presentation system|strain. (a) is a diagram for explaining a fifth effect system, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a sixth effect system. It is a figure explaining an example of the content of the production|presentation of a 5th production|presentation system|strain. It is a figure explaining an example of the content of the production|presentation of a 6th production|presentation system|strain. 9 is a flowchart for explaining sub timer interrupt processing in the sub control board according to the embodiment; 9 is a flowchart for explaining counter update processing in the sub control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart explaining the variation pattern command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol designation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. 9 is a flowchart for explaining opening designation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart for explaining a special winning opening designation command reception process in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart for explaining a general electric power disconnect designation command reception process in the sub control board according to the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart for explaining normal power closing designation command reception processing in the sub control board according to the embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining additional processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment;

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific numerical values shown in these examples are merely examples for facilitating understanding of the invention, and do not limit the invention unless otherwise specified. In the present specification and drawings, elements having substantially the same function and configuration are given the same reference numerals to omit redundant description, and elements that are not directly related to the present invention are omitted from the drawings. do.

In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a reference example of simultaneous rotation, the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of a so-called simultaneous rotation machine, and specific processing for each substrate will be described. Then, as an effect reference example, a specific effect that can be executed in the simultaneous spinning machine and a specific process related to the effect will be described. After that, as examples of the present invention, configurations different from each reference example will be specifically described.

<Simultaneous rotation reference example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a simultaneous turning reference example, showing a state in which the door is opened. As shown, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a space is formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, a middle frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed, and the A front frame 106 attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable is provided.

Like the outer frame 102, the middle frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and a game board 108 is held in this surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transmission plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed with respect to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110 face each other substantially parallel to each other while maintaining a predetermined distance. , the game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110 .

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As shown in this figure, an operation handle 112 projecting toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower portion of the front frame 106 . The operating handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate it, and when the player rotates the operating handle 112 to perform a shooting operation, the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 112 is applied (not shown). A game ball is shot by the shooting mechanism. The game ball shot in this manner rises between rails 114 a and 114 b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116 .

The game area 116 is a space formed between the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110, and is an area in which game balls can flow down or roll. A large number of nails and pinwheels (not shown) are provided on the game board 108, and a game ball guided to the game area 116 collides with the nails and pinwheels to flow down and roll in irregular directions. I have to.

The game area 116 is provided with a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of penetration of the game ball is different from each other according to the firing intensity of the shooting mechanism, and the game ball can be hit separately. The first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second game area 116b is located on the left side of the game area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100. located on the right side of the Since the rails 114a and 114b are located on the left side of the game area 116, the game ball fired by the shooting mechanism with a shooting intensity lower than a predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a and is shot with a shooting intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined intensity. The played game ball enters the second game area 116b.

In addition, the game area 116 is provided with a general winning opening 118 into which a game ball can enter, a first fixed starting opening 120A, a first variable starting opening 120B, a second starting opening 122, and a normal figure operating opening 125. , These general winning opening 118, the first fixed starting opening 120A, the first variable starting opening 120B, the second starting opening 122, when the game ball enters the normal figure operation opening 125, predetermined prize balls are paid out to the player respectively. be In addition, below, 120 A of 1st fixed starting openings and the 1st variable starting opening 120B are generically called the 1st starting opening 120. As shown in FIG.

Although details will be described later, a first start-up region is provided within the first start-up port 120 and a second start-up region is provided within the second start-up port 122 . Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122 and enters the first start area or the second start area, one of a plurality of special symbols provided in advance is selected. A lottery is held to determine 1 special symbol. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not it is possible to execute a big winning game or a small winning game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, the player can obtain a predetermined prize ball and at the same time obtain an opportunity to obtain rights to receive various game benefits. becomes.

In addition, the first fixed starting opening 120A, the second starting opening 122 and the normal figure operating opening 125 are constituted by fixed starting openings that are open so that the game ball can be entered at all times. On the other hand, the first variable starting port 120B is provided with a movable piece 120b that can be opened and closed, and the ease with which a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B changes according to the state of the movable piece 120b. It consists of a variable starting port. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, and during this time, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125, the lottery of the normal symbol described later is performed. If a winning lottery is won by this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to be open for a predetermined period of time. When the movable piece 120b is in an open state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In this way, the movable piece 120b is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B, and makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B than in the open state. Alternatively, it functions as a movable member (start variable winning device) that shifts to an impossible closed state.

In addition, the first fixed starting port 120A can enter only the game ball that flows down the first game area 116a, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are the games that flow down the second game region 116b. It is arranged in a position where only the ball can enter. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first fixed starting port 120A, but in this case, the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a is the second It is desirable to arrange the game area 116b at a position where it is easier to enter the game ball than the game ball flowing down.

Similarly, the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 may enter the game ball that flows down the first game area 116a, but in this case, the game that flows down the second game area 116b It is desirable that the ball be arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a. In any case, the first fixed starting port 120A is arranged at a position where at least the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a can enter, and the first variable starting port 120B and the second starting port 122 are at least the first It is preferable that the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b is arranged at a position where it can enter.

Further, a first big winning opening 126 and a second big winning opening 128 are provided in the second game area 116b. The first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are arranged at positions where only game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter. However, the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 may be arranged so that any game ball flowing down the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b can enter.

An opening/closing door 126b is provided in the first big winning hole 126 so that it can be opened and closed. Ball is not possible. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 126b is in a closed state, it is flush with the board surface of the game board 108, and the game balls flow down in front of the first big winning hole 126. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big win game is executed, the opening and closing door 126b is opened and functions as a tray for guiding the game ball to the first big winning hole 126, and the game ball enters the first big winning hole 126. ball becomes possible. When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The second big winning hole 128 is provided below the first big winning hole 126 in the second game area 116b. The second big prize winning opening 128 has a movable piece 128b, and normally the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state. On the other hand, when a small winning game, which will be described later, is executed, the movable piece 128b is controlled to be in an open state, and a game ball can enter the second big winning hole 128. As shown in FIG. In addition, hereinafter, the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128 are collectively referred to simply as the big prize opening.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the second big winning opening 128 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. A structure 129 projecting to the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. The structure 129 surrounds the gaming machine 100 on four sides positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction and the bottom side, and an opening is formed at the top. An opening formed in the upper part of this structure 129 serves as the second prize winning opening 128 . A movable piece 128b is provided on the upper part of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. .

The movable piece 128b faces above the game machine 100 and protrudes into the game area 116 where the game ball rolls and flows down. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) falls on the movable piece 128b. Here, the base of the structure 129 is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and the right side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly longer in the height direction than the left side. Therefore, the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side of the second big winning opening 128, and the movable piece 128b maintained in the closed state is positioned so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. inclined to Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. will move.

Then, when a small winning game, which will be described later, is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to an open state in which the second big winning opening 128 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 3(b), the movable piece 128b slides toward the back side of the game board 108 to change from the closed state to the open state. As a result, when changing from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls into the second big winning hole 128 by its own weight.

Thus, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly inclined to ensure a long time for the game ball to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b is led into the second big winning hole 128 by the movable piece 128b changing from the closed state to the open state. With the above configuration, even if the time for keeping the movable piece 128b in the open state is set slightly, a predetermined number of game balls can be guided into the second big winning hole 128. FIG. In other words, the time for which the movable piece 128b is kept open, which is required for entering a predetermined number of game balls into the second big winning hole 128, can be shortened. A hole communicating with the back side of the game board 108 is formed in the back side of the structure 129 , and the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 is discharged to the back side of the game board 108 . . Then, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

Although the configuration of the second big winning opening 128 has been described here, the first variable starting opening 120B also has the same configuration as the second big winning opening 128 . That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B projects toward the front side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. In the open state of the movable piece 120b, the movable piece 120b slides to the back side of the game board 108, allowing the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the right side of the movable piece 128b is higher than the left side when the game machine 100 is viewed from the front, while the left side of the movable piece 120b is the right side when the game machine 100 is viewed from the front. located higher than

Here, the board configuration of the second game area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the second starting port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the top of the second game area 116b. All the game balls guided to the second game area 116b enter the second starting port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, the second starting port 122 pays out one game ball as a prize ball for one game ball entering.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a big winning game or a small winning game. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) is to be opened.

A first big winning opening 126 is provided directly below the second starting opening 122 and the gate 124 . When the first big winning hole 126 is in the open state, all the game balls that have flowed down through the gate 124 are arranged to enter the first big winning hole 126 . In the simultaneous spinning reference example, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only in the big win game. In other words, the first big winning hole 126 can be said to be a big winning hole dedicated to big role games. When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126 during a big win game, a predetermined number of two or more (here, 15) game balls are paid out as prize balls for one game ball entering. .

A first variable starting opening 120B is provided below the first big winning opening 126 . In addition, an out port 131 is provided between the first big winning port 126 and the first variable starting port 120B. The out port 131 is an entrance of a passage for discharging game balls from the game area 116, and even if a game ball enters the out port 131, prize balls are not paid out.

Nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that most of the game balls (for example, 90% or more) that have flowed downward from the first big winning hole 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. In addition, a portion (eg, 1% to 10%) of the game balls that have flowed downward from the first big winning hole 126 are guided to the out hole 131 by these nails.

In the closed state of the first variable starting port 120B, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. When the movable piece 120b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable starting port 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for one game ball entering, and whether or not to execute a big win game or a small win game is determined. A lottery will be held.

A game ball that does not enter the first variable starting port 120B falls from the movable piece 120b to the right side when the game machine 100 is viewed from the front. Below the first variable starter opening 120B, a second large winning opening 128 is provided, and most of the game balls dropped from the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second large winning opening 128. do. The game ball on the movable piece 128b rolls slowly from the right side to the left side in the front view of the gaming machine 100 due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b.

Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, the second big winning opening 128 is opened only in the small winning game. That is, the second big winning hole 128 can be said to be a big winning hole dedicated to small winning games. When the movable piece 128b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 128b, all the game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second big winning opening 128.例文帳に追加When a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128 during a small winning game, a predetermined number of two or more (here, 15) game balls are paid out as prize balls for one game ball entering. be

A normal figure operation opening 125 is provided at the lower left of the second big winning opening 128 . Here, a nail is arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all of the game balls dropped downward from the second big winning hole 128 enter the normal figure operation hole 125.例文帳に追加In the simultaneous turning reference example, the normal figure operation opening 125 constitutes a "specific winning opening" in which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for one game ball entry. In addition, when the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125, similarly to the case where the game ball passes through the gate 124, it is determined whether the first variable start port 120B (movable piece 120b) is opened. A lottery will be held.

In addition, at the bottom of the game area 116, there is a game ball that did not enter any of the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the normal drawing opening 125, and the big winning opening is provided from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

The game machine 100 includes a performance display device 200 made of a liquid crystal display device, a performance accessory device 202 made of a movable device, and various lighting modes and light emission colors as performance devices for performing performance during the progress of the game. An effect lighting device 204 made up of a lamp, a sound output device 206 made up of a speaker, and an effect operation device 208 that accepts the player's operation are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display portion 200a consisting of an image display portion for displaying an image. placed as possible. In the main effect display section 200a, as shown in the figure, various effects such as three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed.

The effect accessory device 202 is arranged in front of the main effect display unit 200a, and is usually retracted at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108 in a state of being divided into a plurality of constituent members. It is no longer visible. During the variable display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c, when each constituent member moves to a movable position in front of the main effect display section 200a by driving the actuator, the front surface of the main effect display section 200a Each constituent member is united to give the player a sense of anticipation of a big win.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided in the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is variously controlled to be lit according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at an upper position of the front frame 106 or a lowermost position of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Output audio.

The effect operation device 208 is composed of a button that receives a player's pressing operation, and is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the gaming machine 100 and at a position lower than the transmission plate 110 . This effect operation device 208 is activated in accordance with the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when the player's operation is received within the operation effective time, various operations are performed according to the operation. A performance is performed.

In the figure, reference numeral 132 denotes an upper plate into which prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and game balls rented from the game ball lending device are guided. It will be guided to the lower plate 134 . Also, the bottom surface of the lower tray 134 is formed with a ball removal hole (not shown) for ejecting game balls from the lower tray 134 . This ball extraction hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but when the ball removal knob 134a is pressed down, the opening/closing plate slides together with the ball removal knob 134a to open the ball removal hole. It is possible to discharge the game ball from the lower tray 134 from the bottom.

In addition, on the game board 108, a first special symbol display device 160, a second special symbol display device 162, a first special symbol holding device, and a first special symbol display device 160, a second special symbol display device 162, and a first special symbol reserve are provided outside the game area 116 and at positions visible to the player. A display device 164, a second special symbol reservation display device 166, a normal symbol display device 168, a normal symbol reservation display device 170, and a right-handed information display device 172 are provided. Each of these displays 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations relating to the game, and the details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers and performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 includes a general winning opening detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first fixed opening for detecting that a game ball has entered the first fixed starting opening 120A. A starting port detection switch 120As, a first variable starting port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the first variable starting port 120B, and a second variable starting port that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122. A start opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, a normal diagram operation opening detection switch 125s that detects that a game ball has entered the normal diagram operation opening 125, a first large A first big winning hole detection switch 126s for detecting that a game ball has entered the winning hole 126 and a second big winning hole detection switch 128s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 128 are connected. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

In addition, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 120c that operates the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B, and a first big prize winning port that operates the open/close door 126b that opens and closes the first big prize winning port 126. The solenoid 126c and the second big prize winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second big winning opening 128 are connected. Opening and closing control of the winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 is performed.

Furthermore, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display. A symbol holding indicator 170 and a right-handed information indicator 172 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the display of each of these indicators.

Furthermore, on the back surface of the game board 108, a setting change switch 180s is provided. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible with a dedicated key. Under the condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting value can be changed and confirmed. Although the details will be described later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example, one of six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and according to the stored registered setting value, Game progresses. Here, it is assumed that there are six levels of setting values, but the setting values may be provided in only two levels of high setting and low setting, or may be provided in a plurality of other levels. Furthermore, the set value is not essential, and the advantage level does not have to be changed.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back surface of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and the RAM clear switch 182s detects the pressing operation of the RAM clear button. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input to the main control board 300 from the RAM clear switch 182s. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

A performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back of the game board 108 . The main control board 300 displays the registered set values and the base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 .

In addition, the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example mainly includes a special game that is started by entering a game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, passing the game ball through the gate 124, or , It is roughly divided into a normal game that is started by entering a game ball into the normal pattern operation port 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for progressing special games and normal games, data necessary for various games, and tables.

A payout control board 310 and a sub control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300 . The payout control board 310 performs control for shooting game balls and payout prize balls. This payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to the payout control board 310 , and various information on the progress of the game output from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312 . , is output to a hall computer or the like of the amusement arcade.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage portion to the player as prize balls. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. At this time, the number of put-out game balls is detected by the put-out ball counting switch 316s, and it is grasped whether the prize balls to be put out have been put out to the player.

Further, the payout control board 310 is connected with a full-dish detection switch 318 s for detecting the full state of the lower tray 134 . This plate full detection switch 318 s is provided in a passage leading game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower plate 134 , and a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310 .

Then, when the lower tray 134 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower tray 134, and are directed toward the payout control board 310 from the tray full detection switch 318s. , the game ball detection signal is continuously input. The payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full when the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period of time, and transmits a full tray command to the main control board 300 . On the other hand, when the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after the full-dish command is transmitted, it is determined that the full-drained state is canceled, and the full-dish full-drain release command is transmitted to the main control board 300 .

Also, the payout control board 310 is provided with a launch control circuit 320 for controlling the launch of game balls. The payout control board 310 is connected with a touch sensor 112s provided on the operating handle 112 for detecting that the player touches the operating handle 112, and an operation volume 112a for detecting the operating angle of the operating handle 112. ing. When a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the shooting control circuit 320 controls the shooting solenoid 112c provided in the game ball shooting device to energize and shoot the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The sub-control board 330 includes a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, and a sub-RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. . The sub CPU 330a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the input signal from the timer, etc., performs arithmetic processing, and executes and controls the performance. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 330a.

Specifically, in the sub-control board 330, the sub-CPU 330a, the sub-ROM 330b, and the sub-RAM 330c cooperate to function as a sub-main, an image control section, a character control section, a lighting control section, and a sound control section. The sub-main decides the content of the effect to be executed, and manages and supervises the execution of the effect according to various input commands. The image control section performs image display control for displaying an image on the main effect display section 200a. The sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as patterns, backgrounds, subtitles, etc. displayed on the main effect display section 200a. It controls the image display of the effect display section 200a.

In addition, the accessory control section drives the actuator according to the management of the presentation by the sub-main, and controls the movement of the presentation accessory device 202 . The lighting control unit controls lighting of the production lighting device 204 . Also, the audio control unit performs audio output control for outputting audio from the audio output device 206 . The sub-ROM 330b stores a large amount of audio data such as sounds and music output from the audio output device 206, and the audio control unit reads the audio data from the sub-ROM 330b and controls the audio output of the audio output device 206. do.

Further, the sub-control board 330 executes a predetermined effect when an operation detection signal is input from the effect operation device detection switch 208s that detects that the effect operation device 208 has been pressed or rotated.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power supply via the power supply board. Also, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply comprising a capacitor.

FIG. 5 is an address map of a memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In FIG. 5, addresses are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and "H" indicates hexadecimal numbers. As shown in FIG. 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b consists of a use area (0000H to 1A7AH) for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the use area, which is used for processing tests defined by gaming machine regulations. and an unused area (2000H to 2BFFH) for storing programs and data for executing processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184) and are provided.

The area used in the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H to 0A89H) that stores programs for controlling the progress of games, an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H that stores data other than programs). ~ 1A7AH) are provided. Note that the used area may not include the unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The non-use area of the main ROM 300b is a program area (2000H to 27FFH) for storing programs for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by game machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184, A data area (2800H to 2BFFH) is provided for storing data other than these programs.

In addition to the used area and the unused area, the memory area of the main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored. ), an unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is a use area (F000H to F1FFH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of a game is being executed, and an area other than the use area. A non-use area (F210H to F228H) that is temporarily used when a program for performing a predetermined test or processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed is provided.

The area used in the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H to F12AH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) is provided for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program. Note that the used area may not include the unused area (F12BH to F1D7H).

In the non-use area of the main RAM 300c, there is a work area (F210H to F21FH), and a stack area (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data while these programs are being executed.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c also has unused areas (F200H to F20FH) and unused areas (F229H to F3FFH) in addition to the used area and the unused area.

In this way, the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c have a usable area for controlling the progress of the game, a processing for performing a test stipulated by gaming machine regulations, and a processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. are provided separately from the non-use area used for executing the

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H to F20FH) is set as a boundary area separating the used area and the unused area, and the boundary between the used area and the unused area becomes clear, and the program for controlling the progress of the game When the non-use area is used during execution, and when the program of the processing for performing the test stipulated by the gaming machine regulations and the processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed It prevents the used area from being used.

The unused area provided between the used area and the unused area should be at least 1 byte or more, preferably 4 bytes or more from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, and is set to 16 bytes or more. is more desirable. Also, although the unused area is prohibited from writing and reading data, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

Next, a game in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example will be described together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous spinning reference example, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, progress in parallel. In the special game, the game progresses in one of the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, and the normal game is in one of the non-time-saving game state, medium-time-saving game state, and time-saving game state. The game progresses.

The details of each game state will be described later, but the low-probability game state is a game state in which the probability of winning the right to execute the big win game in which the big winning opening is opened is set low, and is called a high-probability game state. 1 is a gaming state in which the probability of winning the right to execute a big win game is set high. In addition, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is difficult to open, and the game ball is difficult to enter the first variable start port 120B. It is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in the open state than in the state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In addition, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be in an open state than in the medium-time-saving game state, and the game ball is most likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the game balls are continuously shot toward the second game area 116b during the game, the game balls are set to decrease slightly or hardly decrease. .

As mentioned above, since the special game and normal game progress in parallel, in the simultaneous turning reference example, low probability game state or high probability game state, non-time-saving game state, medium-time-saving game state, time-saving game It becomes a game state in which any of the states is combined. Below, in order to facilitate understanding, the game state related to the special game, ie, the low probability game state and the high probability game state is called a special game state, the game state usually related to the game, ie, non-time-saving game state, medium The time-saving game state and the time-saving game state may be called normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to shoot the game ball into the game area 116, and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, the player is asked to play the game. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as a "big role lottery") is held to decide whether or not to give a profit. In this big win lottery, when a big win is won, a big win game is executed in which the big win hole is opened and a game ball can enter the big win hole, and a game state after the big win game ends. is set to one of the above game states. Below, the major role lottery method will be described.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, various random numbers (jackpot determination random number, winning pattern random number, variation pattern random number) related to the big role lottery are obtained. At the same time, each random value is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. Hereinafter, various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area after the game ball enters the first start port 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 reservation, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area are collectively called special 2 reservation.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the first special figure reservation storage area, and when the game ball enters the second start port 122, special 2 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the second special figure reservation storage area.

For example, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, if the reservation is not stored in any of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area, the first storage unit Store special 1 hold. Also, for example, in a state in which special 1 suspension is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, special 1 suspension is stored in the fourth storage unit Remember. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, in the same manner as above, the special 2 reservation is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number) that is not available.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area are set to four respectively. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters the first start port 120, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special figure reservation storage area, the first start port 120 A special 1 suspension is not newly stored by the entry of a game ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second start port 122, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special figure reservation storage area, the game to the second start port 122 A special 2 hold is not newly memorized by the entry of a ball.

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-65535. Then, when the big win lottery is started, that is, according to the game state when judging the big win, the big win determination random number determination table is selected, and the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number are used. A lottery will be held.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the big win lottery is started for special 1 suspension and special 2 suspension, the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the simultaneous turning reference example, six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each setting value. During the game, the set value is set to one of six levels, and the low-probability jackpot decision random number judgment corresponding to the currently set set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) A lottery for major roles is conducted with reference to the table.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 1 (registered set value = 1), refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10218, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/300.6, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value is set to 2 (registered set value = 2), the large role lottery with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 6(b) is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table b, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10225, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/291.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value is set to 3 (registered set value = 3), the large role lottery with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 6(c) is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10232, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/282.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 4 (registered set value = 4), refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table d, it is determined as a jackpot when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10239, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/274.2, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value is set to 5 (registered set value = 5), the big role lottery with reference to the low-probability jackpot decision random number determination table e shown in FIG. 6(e) is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10246, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/266.4, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 6 (registered set value = 6), refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table f shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table f, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10253, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/259.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. In the high-probability gaming state, when the big win lottery is started for special 1 suspension and special 2 suspension, the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. The high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is also provided for each set value in the same manner as the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table.

In the high-probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value=1), the large role lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 7(a). is done. According to this high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10620, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/105.7, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

Similarly, in the high probability gaming state, if the setting value = 2 ~ 6 is set (registration setting value = 2 ~ 6), the high probability jackpot shown in Figure 7 (b) ~ (f) A major winning lottery is performed with reference to the decision random number determination tables b to f. According to these high-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, when the jackpot determination random number is the value shown in the drawing, it is determined as a jackpot. Therefore, when the set value is 2 to 6, the big win probability is about 1/102.4 to 1/91.0, and the small win probability is about 1/3.45.

As described above, the major role lottery is performed according to the registered setting values. At this time, the probability of winning a big win differs according to the registered set value, and it is easier to win a big win when the registered set value is larger than when the registered set value is small. Here, even if the registered set values are different, the odds of winning the small win are not changed, but the odds of winning the small win may be changed for each registered set value. Also, the small win is not essential, and only one of the big win and the loss may be determined in the big win lottery.

Also, here, the probability of winning the jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different according to the registered set value. Only the probability of winning may differ according to the registered set value.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table and a small winning symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained from within the range of 0-99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the big win lottery, the type of special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, when the "big win" is won by the special 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a is selected, and the "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the winning symbol random number determination table b for special 2 is selected, and when the "small winning" is won by holding the special 1, as shown in FIG. 8(c). Then, the special 1 small winning symbol random number determination table a is selected, and when the "small winning" is won by the special 2 reservation, as shown in FIG. b is selected. In the following, the special pattern determined by the winning pattern random number, that is, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the big hit is obtained is called the jackpot pattern, and it is decided when the judgment result of the small hit is obtained. A special symbol is called a small winning symbol, and a special symbol determined when a loss determination result is obtained is called a losing symbol.

According to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(a) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(b), according to the value of the acquired per symbol random number, As shown in the figure, jackpot symbols (special symbols A to J) are determined as special symbols. Also, according to the special 1 small per symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8 (c) and the special 2 small per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (d), the value of the acquired per symbol random number Accordingly, as shown in the figure, small winning symbols (special symbols Z1 to Z6) are determined as special symbols.

It should be noted that, when the result of the lottery lottery is "losing", when the lottery result is derived by special 1 reservation, the special symbol X is determined as a losing pattern without performing a lottery, and the lottery result is the special 2 When derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as a losing symbol without lottery. That is, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the big win lottery result is "big hit", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "loss" or "minor win". Also, the small win symbol random number determination table is referred only when the big win lottery result is "small win", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "big win" or "losing". In addition, the special symbols Z1 to Z6, which are the small winning symbols, are collectively referred to simply as the special symbol Z.

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram explaining a variation pattern random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 9(b) is a diagram explaining a variation time determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It should be noted that the variation pattern random number determination table, the pending type, the result of the big role lottery (special symbol type), the game state, the number of variations, and the number of pending, but a plurality are provided here, any variation pattern random number determination Table x will be explained. When the type of special symbol is determined as described above, when the game ball enters the variation pattern random number determination table as shown in FIG. Any variation pattern number is determined based on the variation pattern random number in the range of 0 to 238 acquired. Each variation pattern number is associated with a variation time, as shown in FIG. 9(b). This fluctuation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 .

Although details will be described later, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 1 reservation and the variation pattern number, that is, the variation time is determined, the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 over the determined variation time is performed, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 . In addition, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 2 hold and the variation pattern number, that is, the variation time is determined, the variation display of the symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 162 over the determined variation time. After the variation time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162 . At this time, the losing pattern is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 160, so that the losing is determined as a result of the major role lottery, and the major role lottery based on the next special 1 reserve can be executed, and the losing symbol is the second. By stop-displaying on the special symbol display device 162, a loss is determined as a result of the major role lottery, and the major role lottery based on the next special 2 reservation can be executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device 160 or the second special pattern display device 162, the jackpot is determined as a result of the big win lottery, the big win game is executed, and the small win pattern is the second special. When it is stop-displayed on the symbol display 162, a small win is determined as a result of the big win lottery, and a small win game is executed.

In this way, the variable time defines the time for the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, in other words, the time until the result of the major role lottery is determined. However, a plurality of variation pattern random number determination tables for determining this variation time are provided according to the reservation type, the result of the big role lottery (special symbol type), the game state, and the like. As a result, even if the acquired variation pattern random number values are the same, a different variation pattern number, that is, a variation time, is determined depending on the selected variation pattern random number determination table.

When the variation pattern number is determined as described above, a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number is transmitted to the sub control board 330 . In the sub control board 330, based on the received variation pattern command, the aspect of the variation effect is determined, but the details thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the game state and variation time according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As described above, the special game state and the normal game state are combined into one game state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As already explained, the special game state is provided in two types, a low-probability game state and a high-probability game state, in which the odds of winning a jackpot are different. In addition, the normal game state is provided with three types: a non-time-saving game state, a medium-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state, in which the easiness (ball-entering frequency) of the game ball to the first variable start port 120B is different from each other. It is

Here, in the normal game, the ease of entry of the game ball into the first variable starter opening 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, fluctuation time, and opening time. Although details will be described later, in the normal game, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125, normal pattern suspension is stored. Then, based on the stored general pattern reservation, a general pattern lottery for determining whether or not to open the movable piece 120b is performed. The result of this normal drawing lottery is determined when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. When winning is determined as a result of the normal drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b is released. At this time, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery, the fluctuation time, and the opening time when opening the movable piece 120b are set for each normal game state.

In the simultaneous spinning reference example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), six types of game states are provided by combining the special game state and the normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the game state in which the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are combined is called a normal state.

Also, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the game state in which both are combined is called the most dominant state. This highest priority state has the highest degree of advantage among the six game states, and if the game balls are shot appropriately, the number of game balls gradually increases during the game even if the jackpot is not won. It is set to go.

Also, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a low probability game state and a time saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. Below, the game state in which the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state are combined is called a low-probability time-saving state.

Also, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a high probability game state and a time saving game state. Below, the game state in which the high probability game state and the time saving game state are combined is called a high probability time saving state or a high certainty precursor state. In addition, the high-probability time saving state and the high-probability omen state will be described later in detail.

In addition, in the simultaneous turning reference example, it may be set to a high probability game state and a medium time reduction game state. In addition, in the medium time-saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is higher than the non-time-saving game state and lower than the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. This game state can be set when an unforeseen situation occurs, such as when a game ball is not properly shot. In the following, the game state in which the high probability game state and the medium time reduction game state are combined is called a penalty state.

Incidentally, in the sub-control board 330, an effect mode corresponding to the game state set in the main control board 300 is set. The effect mode defines the background image, BGM, etc. displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the content of the effect differs for each effect mode. That is, the player can identify the current game state by the effect mode.

As described above, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, six game states are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the variation pattern random number determination table is selected according to the game state, the type of reservation, the number of variations in the game state, and the type of symbol when the big win lottery is performed. A variation pattern number is determined with reference to the variation pattern random number determination table.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, a substantial variation target is set for each gaming state. The subject of substantial variation originally indicates the type of suspension for which the major role lottery should be performed, and either special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is set as the substantial variation subject for each game state. In the normal state, Special 1 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Also, in the normal state, since the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, the first variable starter opening 120B is hardly opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A.

In the normal state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve which is the actual fluctuation object, and the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the table A is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table A, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the normal state, when the big win lottery is performed by special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the table B is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table B, the variation time is determined within the range of 40-100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the major role lottery is performed with the special 2 reservation that is not subject to actual fluctuation, the table C is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table C, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes. In this way, by setting the variable time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player enters the game ball into the second start port 122, the major role lottery based on the special 2 reservation Very few opportunities to do so.

Specifically, the second starter opening 122 is provided in the second game area 116b, and the second starter opening 122 is always configured as a fixed starter opening into which game balls can enter. Furthermore, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second starting hole 122 is arranged at a position where a game ball enters more easily than the first starting hole 120.例文帳に追加Therefore, if the fluctuation time for the special 2 hold is shortened in the normal state, the player will be given more chances than necessary for the winning lottery. Therefore, in accordance with the original playability in the normal state, the variation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes in order to appropriately shoot the game ball toward the first game area 116a.

In the highest priority state, Special 2 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Therefore, in the highest priority state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 122.例文帳に追加In the highest priority state, when a major role lottery is performed with a special 1 reservation that is not subject to substantial fluctuation, table D is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table D, the variation time is always determined to be 10 seconds. In addition, in the case where the major role lottery is performed by special 1 suspension that is not subject to substantial fluctuation in the most dominant state, compared to the case where the major role lottery is performed by special 2 suspension that is not subject to substantial fluctuation in the normal state, the game performance is improved. little impact. Therefore, in the highest priority state, the change time when the major role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation, which is not subject to real change, is set as short as 10 seconds.

In the highest priority state, when a big win lottery is performed by the special 2 reserve which is the actual fluctuation target, and a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is determined, the table E is selected as a fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table E, the variation time is determined within the range of 1 second to 3 seconds. Also, in the highest priority state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 2 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the table F is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table F, the variation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds.

In both the low probability short working hours state and the high certainty short working hours state, special 1 suspension is set as a real fluctuation target. In addition, in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the normal game state is set to the time saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in these two game states, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In these two game states, the same variation pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two game states are common in that the normal game state is the time-saving game state. In other words, when the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the big role lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation that is the actual fluctuation target, and when the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the table G is used as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. selected. According to this table G, a fluctuation time of 1 second is always determined. In addition, in the case of the low-probability short working hours state and the high-probable short working hours state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the table H is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table H, the variation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

In the highly probable omen state, special 1 suspension is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Further, in the high-probability omen state, the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In the high-probability omen state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve which is the actual fluctuation object, and the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the table J is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table J, the variation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds. In addition, in the high-probability omen state, when the big win lottery is performed by the special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the table K is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table K, the variation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, when the low-probability short-time state, the high-probability short-time state and the high-probability omen state, that is, when the normal game state is the time-saving game state, when the big role lottery is performed by the special 2 hold that is not subject to real fluctuation, Different fluctuation patterns according to the number of fluctuations related to special 2 suspension after being set in each game state (the number of times of fluctuation display of the symbol in the second special symbol display device 162. Hereinafter referred to as "second fluctuation number") A random number decision table is selected. Specifically, when the number of second fluctuations after the time-saving gaming state is set is four times or less, a special table is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this special table, the variable time is always determined to be 1 minute. On the other hand, when the number of times of the second variation after the time-saving gaming state is set is 5 times or more, table I is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this Table I, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In the penalty state, special 1 suspension is set as a substantial fluctuation target. In addition, in the penalty state, the normal game state is set to the middle-time-saving game state, and the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to the open state at a constant frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. In the penalty state, when the big winning lottery is performed by the special 1 reserve which is the object of substantial fluctuation, and the losing pattern or the small winning pattern is determined, the table L is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table L, the variable time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the penalty state, when the big winning lottery is performed by special 1 reservation and the big winning pattern is determined, the table M is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table M, the variation time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the penalty state, when a major role lottery is performed with a special 2 reservation that is not subject to actual fluctuation, table N is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table N, the variable time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

As described above, a substantial variation target is set for each game state, and when a major role lottery based on a reservation type as a substantial variation target is performed, the maximum variation time is 100 seconds. On the other hand, when the big role lottery based on the reservation type which is not subject to actual variation is performed, the variation time is approximately 10 minutes, so that the game contrary to the original game characteristics is not performed.

In addition, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability short-time state (second period) is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability omen state (first period), but the high-probability short time The average change time of the state (second period) may be longer than the average change time of the high probability precursor state (first period). That is, the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability reduced working hours state (second period) and the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability portent state (first period) may be different.

FIG. 11 is the first diagram for explaining the special electric accessory operating ram set table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 12 is the first diagram for explaining the special electric accessory operating ram set table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. 2. FIG. In addition, the special electric role product operating ram set table stores various data for controlling the big role game or the small winning game, and the special electric role product operating ram set By referring to the table, the energization of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled. In fact, a plurality of special electric accessory actuating ramset tables are provided for each type of special symbols (both jackpot symbols and small winning symbols), and depending on the type of special symbol determined, the corresponding table plays a major role. Although it is set at the start of a game or a small winning game, here, for convenience of explanation, control data of special symbols are shown for each type of symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11, the big winning game is composed of a plurality of round games in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small winning game is executed only once. According to this special electric role product operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started), the maximum number of times of special electric role product operation (executed during one big role game or small winning game number of round games to be played), number of times of opening and closing special electric accessories (number of times the large winning opening is opened in one round), solenoid energization time (first large winning opening solenoid 126c or second Energizing time of the large winning opening solenoid 128c, that is, opening time of one large winning opening), specified number (maximum number of possible winnings to the large winning opening in one round game), effective time of closing the large winning opening (round Closing time of the big winning opening between games, that is, interval time), ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game to the restart of the normal special game (fluctuation display of symbols described later)) However, as control data, it is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each type of special symbol.

Incidentally, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols A, B, and D are determined as jackpot symbols, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. In this big win game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In these big win games, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

In addition, when a small winning is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as small winning symbols, a small winning game composed of one round game is executed. In this small winning game, the second big winning opening 128 is opened once for 0.1 seconds in one round game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12, when a jackpot is won by special 2 reservation and special patterns F, G, and I are determined as jackpot patterns, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. be. In this big win game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the first to fourth round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by special 2 reservation and special patterns H and J are determined as jackpot patterns, a big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In this big win game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first big prize opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds. The first prize winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends.

Further, even when a small winning is won by special 2 reservation and special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as small winning symbols, a small winning game consisting of one round game is executed. Here, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened twice for 0.1 seconds in one round game. It should be noted that the interval time during the round, which is the pause time between opening the second big winning hole 128 twice, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game ball is shot at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, considering the opening time of the second big winning hole 128 and the shooting interval of the game ball, the game ball will be the second big winning during this small winning game. The probability of hitting the ball in the mouth 128 is low.

However, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the structure is such that game balls tend to stay on the movable piece 128b that maintains the second big winning hole 128 in the closed state, and the movable piece 128b is moved to the open state, so that the movable piece 128b can move. A game ball staying on the piece 128b is guided into the second big winning hole 128. - 特許庁Therefore, by opening the second big winning hole 128 twice for 0.1 seconds, 2 to 3 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128 on average.

Further, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds×3 times in one round game. In this case, the in-round interval time is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, 3 to 4 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128 on average.

Furthermore, in the small winning game when the special symbol Z6 is determined as the small winning symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds×12 times in one round game. In this case, the in-round interval time is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small winning game, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is almost certain that a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter the second big winning hole 128. can.

In the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the shot prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of game balls shot and the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, in the simultaneous turning reference example, a special symbol Z4 in which 0.1 second opening is performed twice in the small winning game, and a special symbol Z5 in which 0.1 second opening is performed three times in the small winning game are provided, Only by changing these selection ratios, the shot prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the big win game according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. In the simultaneous spinning reference example, when the big win game is executed, the game state setting table is referred to according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of reservation, and the type of special pattern (jackpot pattern), and after the big win game ends Set the game state of

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the penalty state, when the jackpot is won by holding special 1 which is the object of substantial variation, the game state after the big win game is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. Specifically, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of continuation times of the time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving number of times") is set to 100 times. This means that the time-saving gaming state continues until the big win lottery is performed 100 times. However, the number of times of time saving described above indicates the maximum number of times of continuation in the time saving game state of 1, and if the jackpot is won before the number of times of continuation is reached, the game state is set again. It will happen. Therefore, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the big role game, when the lottery result other than the big win is derived 100 times without deriving the jackpot lottery result in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state The game state is changed to (normal state).

In addition, when the special symbols B and D are determined as the jackpot symbols, a high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high-probability number of times, and the high-probability game state continues until the next big win is won. In addition, "next time" is set as the number of time-saving games, and the time-saving game state continues until the next big win is won. Therefore, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the high-probability time-saving state continues until the next big win is won after the big win game.

In addition, when the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special game state is the high probability game state, and the normal game state is the time saving game state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number of times, and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times. When the special symbols C and E are determined, the high-probability game state continues until the next big win is won, while the time-saving game state ends after 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbols C and E are determined, after the big win game, the game state shifts to the highest priority state when the result of the big win lottery is derived 100 times.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the normal state or the penalty state, if the big win is won by holding special 2 which is not subject to real variation, the game state after the big win game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the normal state (the special game state is the low probability game state, and the normal game state is the non-time-saving game state). Also, when the special symbols G to J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the penalty state is set (the special game state is the high-probability game state, and the normal game state is the medium-short-time game state). At this time, both the high-probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to "next time".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the highest priority state, if the big win is won by special 1 reservation which is not subject to real variation, the game state after the big win game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols B to E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the game state after the big win game is set in the same manner as the normal state and the penalty state.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the highest priority state, when the jackpot is won by holding special 2, which is the object of substantial variation, the game state after the big win game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low-probability time-saving state (the special game state is a low-probability game state, and the normal game state is a time-saving game state). At this time, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high-probability time-saving state (the special game state is the high-probability game state, and the normal game state is the time-saving game state) is set. At this time, the high probability number of times and the time saving number of times are set to "next time".

In addition, when the special symbols H and J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special game state is the high probability game state, and the normal game state is the time saving game state) is set. At this time, the high probability number of times is set to "next time", and the time saving number of times is set to 100 times.

Also, if the game state at the time of jackpot winning is a low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, high-probability omen state, that is, if the normal game state is a short-time game state, the game state after the big win game is the normal state and penalty conditions.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a winning determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal figure operation opening 125, it is associated whether or not the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting opening 120B is energized and controlled. Normal design determination processing (hereinafter referred to as "normal drawing lottery") is performed.

In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation port 125, one hit determination random number is acquired from within the range of 0 to 99, and this random Numerical values are stored up to four in the general map reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. That is, the general pattern reservation storage area has four storage units for saving the hit determination random numbers. Therefore, in the state in which the determined random number is stored in all four storage units of the normal pattern reservation storage area, the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal pattern operation port 125, the game No hit decision random numbers are stored based on ball passage. In the following, the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal pattern operation port 125 and the hit decision random number stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area is called normal pattern reservation.

When the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, when the normal drawing lottery is started, as shown in FIG. According to this non-time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost pattern is determined as the type of the normal pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. Although details will be described later, when the winning pattern is determined in this normal pattern lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to the open state, and when the losing pattern is determined, the first variable starting The movable piece 120b of the mouth 120B is kept closed.

In addition, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the medium time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. According to this middle-time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 49, the hit design is determined as the normal design type, and when the hit determination random number is 50 to 99 Then, a lost symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the middle-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 50/100.

In addition, when starting the normal figure lottery in the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. According to this time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 98, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 99, normal A lost pattern is determined as the type of the pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

FIG. 15(a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, when the general pattern lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined. The normal symbol variation time data table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation time when a winning symbol or a losing symbol is determined by a normal symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol variation time data table, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state and the medium-time-saving game state, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and the game state is set to the time-saving game state. If so, the variation time is determined to be 1 second. When the variable time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is variable-displayed (blinking-displayed) over the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is lit, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is extinguished.

Then, when the winning pattern is determined by the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern display 168 is lit, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to open and close as shown in FIG. 15(b). The energization is controlled by referring to the pattern table. Actually, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c according to the game state when the normal symbol is determined. .

When the winning pattern is determined, as shown in FIG. 15(b), the opening/closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is performed with reference to the opening/closing control pattern table. According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal electric opening (waiting time until the opening of the first variable starting port 120B is started), the maximum number of opening/closing switching times of normal electric accessories (opening of the first variable starting port 120B number of times), solenoid energization time (energization time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c for each number of times the first variable starter opening 120B is opened, that is, opening time of the first variable starter 120B once), specified number (first variable The maximum number of winnings to the first variable starting port 120B during the full opening of the starting port 120B), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, the rest time), the normal power Effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the first variable start port 120B), normal electric end wait time (after the normal electric effective state time elapses, waiting until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol described later is resumed time) is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each game state as the control data for the first variable start port 120B.

In this way, by setting the winning probability, variation time, and release time of normal symbols, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1st variable starting port 120B, 2nd starting port 122, normal pattern operation port 125 and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the player by entering the game ball in the normal pattern operation port 125 and the big winning port) is the number of shots : Number of prize balls = 100:20, Number of shots in the medium time-saving game state: Number of prizes = 100:40, Number of shots in the time-saving game state: Number of prize balls = 100:99.

The open/close condition of the first variable starting port 120B defines three elements: winning probability of normal symbols, variable display time of normal symbols, and opening time of the first variable starting port 120B. In other words, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of normal symbols, the time of variable display of normal symbols, and the opening time of the first variable start port 120B, in each of the non-time-saving game state, medium-time-saving game state, and time-saving game state, It is possible to set the entry frequency of game balls to the first variable starting port 120B and the launch prize ball ratio. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only an example, and if the three elements are combined so that the shot prize ball ratio is higher in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state good.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game property according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. With the configuration described above, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following game characteristics. Here, a case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, the normal state shown in FIG. 16(a) is set. In the normal state, since the substantial variable object is set to special 1 reservation, the player shoots the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player normally performs so-called "left-handed".

When the game ball enters the first fixed starting port 120A, the special 1 reservation is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area. The special 1 reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage area is sequentially read out when the starting condition is established, and a major role lottery based on the read special 1 reservation is performed. At this time, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300.6. In the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning a big win in the big win lottery based on this special 1 reservation. In addition, the shot prize ball ratio is set to 100:20 when the game balls are shot toward the first game area 116a, and the number of game balls decreases during the game.

Then, in a normal state, when a big win is won in a big win lottery with special 1 reservation, a big win game is executed. In this big win game, the round game in which the first big winning hole 126 is opened is executed 4 times or 10 times, and the player can win prize balls for 4 rounds or 10 rounds. Then, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation, one of the special patterns A to E is determined as a jackpot pattern.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the game state after the big win game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). When a jackpot is won with special 1 reservation, the probability that the special pattern A is determined as a jackpot pattern is 30%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to the low-probability short-time state with a probability of 30%. In the low probability time saving state, the real fluctuation target is set to special 1 reservation, but since the normal game state is the time saving game state, the player enters the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. A right-handed shot is made aiming at the second game area 116b.

That is, in this low-probability short-time state, as in the normal state, in the big role lottery based on special 1 reservation, the game will be played for the purpose of winning the jackpot. In the low-probability time-saving state, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/300.6, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the shot prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can aim for a big win while reducing consumption of game balls.

In addition, when moving to a low-probability time-saving state, the number of times of time-saving is set to 100 times, and if the jackpot is not won in 100 times of the big role lottery, the game state will shift to the normal state again (time-saving omission ).

In addition, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 are the special symbols B and D, the game state after the big win game is the high-accuracy time-saving shown in (c) of FIG. state. When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbols B and D are determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to the high-probability time-saving state with a probability of 35%. In the high-probability time-saving state, the real variable target is set to special 1 reservation, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player enters the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. A right-handed shot is made aiming at the second game area 116b.

In other words, in this high-probability time-saving state, as in the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning the jackpot in the big role lottery based on the special 1 reservation. In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/105.7, and the normal game state is the time saving game state, so that the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the shot prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can perform the big role lottery while reducing consumption of game balls. Therefore, in the high-probability short-time state, substantially, it can be said that the election of the next jackpot is guaranteed.

Further, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 are the special symbols C and E, the game state after the big win game is a high certainty omen shown in (d) of FIG. state. When a jackpot is won with the special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to the high probability portent state with a probability of 35%. In the high-probability omen state, the real fluctuation target is set to special 1 reservation, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player has to enter the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. A right-handed shot is made aiming at the second game area 116b.

Then, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the state is set to the high-probability portent state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big win game reaches 100 times, the time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state becomes a non-time-saving game state. As a result, the game state shifts to the highest priority state shown in (e) of FIG. 16 due to time saving. As will be described later in detail, in the highest priority state, the number of game balls can be increased simply by continuously shooting game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, the purpose of the game is not to win the jackpot, but to get out of the game quickly without winning the jackpot.

According to the special 1 reservation of the real fluctuation target in the high probability omen state, high probability short working hours state, low probability short working hours state, special symbols A to E are determined as jackpot symbols when winning the jackpot. When the special symbol A is determined, four round games are executed in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). Further, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability time saving state. Further, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability precursor state.

In the highest priority state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 reservation is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 reserve stored in the second special figure reserve storage area is sequentially read out when the starting condition is established, and a major role lottery is performed based on the read special 2 reserve. At this time, the probability of winning the big prize is set to approximately 1/105.7, and the probability of winning the small prize is set to approximately 1/3.45. In the highest priority state, winning a small win is the most important purpose of the game in the big win lottery based on this special 2 reservation.

Specifically, when the game ball is launched into the second game area 116b, the ratio of the prize balls paid out by the game ball entering the second start port 122 to the number of launched balls is 100:60-80. is set to an extent. Then, in the highest priority state, in the big win lottery with special 2 reservation, a small winning game is frequently played because a small winning is won with a probability of about 1/3.45. Here, when a small win is won by special 2 reservation, small win symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128. In the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z5 is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second big winning hole 128.例文帳に追加Furthermore, in the small winning game when the small winning symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, almost a specified number of game balls enter the second big winning opening 128.例文帳に追加

When a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for one game ball entering the game ball. As a result, in the highest priority state, the shot prize ball ratio, which is the ratio of the number of all prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes 100:120. can be increased.

In addition, in this most dominant state, the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, and the movable piece 120b is almost never in an open state. In addition, in the highest priority state, the special game state is a high probability game state, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the highest priority state is about 1/105.7. It can be said that the winning of the jackpot is guaranteed.

According to the special 2 reservation of the real variation object in this highest priority state, when the big win is won, the special symbols F to J are determined as the big win symbols. When the special symbol F is determined, four round games are executed in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16(b). Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability time saving state. Also, when the special symbols H and J are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big win game, and the game state after the big win game becomes a high probability precursor state.

Since the most dominant state has an extremely high degree of advantage compared to other game states, the most important purpose of the game in the gaming machine 100 is to shift the game state to the most dominant state. As described above, the game is first started in the normal state, but the normal state does not suddenly transition to the highest priority state. Therefore, the transition route to the most dominant state via the high probability portent state is the transition route to the most dominant state in the gaming machine 100 .

Furthermore, in the simultaneous turning reference example, winning a specific small winning symbol is set as a transition condition from the high probability omen state to the most dominant state, apart from the time saving omission in the high probability omen state. Specifically, when a small hit is won by special 1 reservation, which is a real fluctuation target in a high certainty omen state, the special pattern Z1 is 1%, the special pattern Z2 is 69%, and the special pattern Z3 is 30 as a small winning pattern. % probability (see FIG. 8(c)).

At this time, when the special symbol Z1 is determined as the small winning symbol, the time saving game state ends with the end of the small winning game, and as a result, the game state shifts to the highest priority state.

In this way, since the state is shifted to the highest priority state by winning a specific small win, compared to the case where the state is shifted to the highest priority state only when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (100 times), it is easier for the player. Therefore, a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension are constantly imparted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned high probability omen state, high probability short working hours state, low probability short working hours state, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/3.45. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, the high-probability short working hours state, and the low-probable short working hours state, similarly to the most dominant state, the small winning game is frequently executed. However, the high-probability portent state, the high-probability short working hours state, and the low-probable short working hours state are all normal game states in the short working hours gaming state. In addition, although it will be described later in detail, even during the small winning game, the normal game state is maintained in the time saving game state. Therefore, although the second big winning opening 128 is opened during the small winning game, the first variable starting opening 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable starting port 120B is provided above the second big winning port 128, and in the time saving game state, the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B is the second big winning much longer than the opening time of mouth 128. Therefore, in the high-probability omen state, high-probability short-time state, and low-probability short-time state, most of the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b enter the first variable starting port 120B, and enter the second big winning port 128. Almost no game ball enters. As a result, in the high-probability portent state, the high-probability short-time state, and the low-probability short-time state, unlike the most dominant state, even if the player hits right during the game, the number of game balls gradually decreases.

As described above, when the game progresses by the real variation object in accordance with the original game nature, when the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the big role game is a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, a high probability omen state set to either. And, the high probability time saving state and the high probability omen state have in common that the special game state is the high probability game state and the normal game state is the time saving game state. On the other hand, the high-probability time-saving state continues until the next jackpot is won, whereas the high-probability omen state is the winning of a specific small hit (special symbol Z1) or the time-saving omission. The difference is that the state is shifted to the highest priority state.

In addition, in the high-probability short-time state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is set to 1 second, while in the high-probability omen state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is 3 to 10 seconds. It differs in that it is set within the range (see FIG. 10(b)). That is, the average of the variable time in the high-probability short-time state is set shorter than the average of the variable time in the high-probability omen state.

Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving state, since the fluctuation time at the time of the small hit and the loss is relatively short, the real fluctuation object can be digested at high speed until the big hit is won. Although detailed description is omitted, during the special symbol variation time, the sub-control board 330 performs variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. In the high probability time saving state, the variable display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is also relatively short. Therefore, in the high probability time saving state, as long as the special 1 reservation continues to be stored, the special 1 reservation (variable display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c) will continue to be digested at high speed, and the time until winning the jackpot It can be shortened, and the player can play until the next big win without feeling stress (reduced).

On the other hand, in the high-probability omen state, the variation time is relatively long at the time of small win and at the time of loss, but in the sub-control board 330, an effect is performed as to whether or not to shift to the highest priority state. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the game will shift to the highest priority state.

Thus, in the high-probability short-time state, even if a specific small hit (special pattern Z1) is won, it does not shift to the most dominant state, but by setting the average of the fluctuation time short, the next big hit It is possible to shorten the time until winning the prize, and reduce the stress on the player. In addition, in the high-probability omen state, the average of the fluctuation time is set longer than in the high-probability short-time state. It can give people a sense of expectation and a sense of tension.

As described above, the special game state is a high-probability game state, and the high-probability time-saving state and high-probability precursor state that are common to the normal game state being a time-saving game state are provided, and the fluctuation of the high-probability time-saving state By making the average of the time shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability portent state, new playability can be provided.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not properly played according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 160 and the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 162 are performed in parallel. At this time, if there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged as a result of the large winning lottery being held due to the hold other than the actual variable object, the variable time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after the big win lottery is performed due to the holding other than the real fluctuation target, for example, as a result of interrupting the game, the jackpot due to the holding other than the real fluctuation target may be decided. In this case, the game state changes as shown in FIG.

The main processing of the main control board 300 for realizing the above-described game characteristics will be described below.

FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining gaming machine state flags according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game is ready to progress is managed by a gaming machine state flag. One of six types of flag values from 00H to 05H is set in the gaming machine state flag. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=00H indicates a playable state. When the gaming machine state flag is 00H, the progress of the game is controlled. be stopped.

The flag value of the game machine state flag=01H indicates a setting change state, and when the game machine state flag is 01H, the registered set value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=02H indicates the setting confirmation state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 02H, the registered set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and the registered set value is confirmed. It is possible to confirm. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=03H indicates a setting abnormality state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 03H, the game is stopped as the registered setting value is abnormal. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=05H indicates an abnormal checksum status, and if the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the game machine state flag is set to any flag value, and processing corresponding to the game machine state flag is performed.

(CPU initialization processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 19 is a first flowchart illustrating CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 20 illustrates CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart which carries out.

When power is supplied from the power board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization processing (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. A power interruption detection circuit is provided in the main control board 300, and a power interruption warning signal is output from the power interruption detection circuit when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. If the power-off notice signal is detected, the process proceeds to step S100-3, and if the power-off notice signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-9, and when it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes necessary processing to permit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag before power-off to the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches (is normal) the checksum saved when the power was turned off, and whether the backup flag is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the backup flag and checksum are normal, the process moves to step S100-15, and if either or both are determined to be abnormal, the process moves to step S100-25. .

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include the setting value and the gaming machine status flag as the top address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button has been pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S100-19. .

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a checks whether the value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (game ready status), whether the setting change switch 180s is on, and whether the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, when it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-21, and when it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 02H (setting confirmation state). That is, when the power is normally turned on in a state in which the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the RAM clear button is not pressed, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process of clearing the area to be cleared at the time of power return, which is the area after the top address set in step S100-15 in the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs out-of-area read/write check processing for checking and clearing the read/write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including a set value and a gaming machine state flag to the leading address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read/write memory in step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be normal, the process moves to step S100-37, and if it is determined to be not normal, the process moves to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register, and shifts the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, when it is determined that 02H is set, the process moves to step S100-39, and when it is determined that 02H is not set, the process moves to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (game ready state) in the D register.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-43, and when it is determined that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-45. Here, at least the setting change conditions include that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process of clearing the clear target of the main RAM 300c when clearing the RAM, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of transmitting a payout command (RAM clear designation command) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared (stores the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer).

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the gaming machine state flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable state). As a result, if it is determined to be 00H, the process moves to step S110, and if it is determined not to be 00H, the process moves to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group set processing. This subcommand group set process will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the cycle of the timer interrupt.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for prohibiting interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the end value of the winning symbol random number. In other words, when the winning design random number is updated from the winning design random number initial value update random number to the winning design random number initial value update random number -1, the winning design random number is at that time. It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning design random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300 a performs processing for transmitting the sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the processing from step S100-59. In the following description, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number for determining the variable effect pattern are collectively referred to as variable effect random numbers.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart for explaining the subcommand group set process (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process of setting a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs setting value designation command setting processing for setting a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 reservation designation command setting process for setting a special figure 1 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 1 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 reservation designation command setting process for setting a special figure 2 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 2 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number command setting process of setting a number command indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process for setting a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating a variation pattern selection state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase specification command setting process for setting a special figure phase specification command indicating a special game management phase in a transmission buffer. Incidentally, the special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is waiting for a special symbol variation. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the special symbol variation waiting state, the processing is moved to step S110-21, and when it is determined that it is not in the special symbol variation waiting state, the subcommand group set processing is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and terminates the subcommand group set process.

Next, interrupt processing in the main control board 300 will be described. Here, save processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing at power failure will be described.

(Save processing when main control board 300 is powered off (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining the saving process (XINT interrupt process) at the time of power failure in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power failure detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the save process at power failure.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S300-11, and when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S300-7. .

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting an interrupt, and terminates the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes checksum setting processing for calculating and storing a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes RAM protection setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the loop counter to the predetermined number of power failure detection signal detections in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S300-17, and when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S300-23. .

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the loop counter is zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the above-described CPU initialization process (step S100) is performed.

It should be noted that when the power is actually cut off, the operation of the game machine 100 is stopped while the steps S300-17 to S300-25 are being looped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the simultaneous rotation reference example, hereinafter referred to as "4 ms"). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted, and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, the first special symbol indicator 160, the second special symbol indicator 162, the first special symbol reserve indicator 164, the second special symbol reserve. A dynamic port output process for controlling lighting of the display 166, the normal symbol display 168, the normal symbol reservation display 170, the right-handed information display 172, and the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various types of input port information and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). As a result, when it is determined to be 00H, the process moves to step S400-15, and when it is determined not to be 00H, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 03H (set abnormal state) or higher. As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process moves to step S400-27, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process moves to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes setting-related processing, and shifts the processing to step S400-27. Note that the setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters. Here, the various timer counters are decremented each time the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 300 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes the process of updating the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number in the same manner as in step S100-61.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding 1, and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0. The random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning design random number.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number use hardware random numbers updated by a hardware random number generator built in the main control board 300. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot determined random numbers and the winning determined random numbers according to a fixed rule, automatically changes the random number sequence each time the random number sequence completes a cycle, and resets the start value each time the system is reset. are changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a includes a first fixed start opening detection switch 120As, a first variable start opening detection switch 120Bs, a second start opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a normal figure operation opening detection switch 125s, and a first big winning opening detection switch. 126s, a switch management process for determining whether or not a signal has been input from the second big winning opening detection switch 128s is executed. The details of this switch management processing will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the special game. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes normal game management processing for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes error management processing for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first big winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second big winning opening detection switch 128s. Execute winning opening switch processing for adding a counter or the like for controlling winning balls.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes external information management processing for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a has a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol reservation display 170. , LED display setting processing for setting display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed information indicator 172 to the output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c, and the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, and executes the solenoid output image synthesis processing for storing in the output port buffer. .

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a executes port output processing for outputting the common output buffer value stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for prohibiting interrupts.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a uses the non-use area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184. Executes performance display monitor control processing to be set in the output buffer. Note that in the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may alternately display the base ratio for the current period and the base ratio for the previous period at predetermined time intervals. Also, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched according to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a restores the register and terminates the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining the setting-related processing (S450) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). As a result, if it is determined to be 01H, the process moves to step S450-3, and if it is determined not to be 01H, the process moves to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set values stored in the set value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-7, and when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-9. .

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the set value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the set value of the processing area is in the range of 1-6. As a result, when it is determined that the set value is within the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-13, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-11. to move.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area to one.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area in the set value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end designation command indicating the end of the setting-related processing in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process of FIG. That is, if the setting related process is executed, at the end, model command, setting value designation command, special figure 1 reserve designation command, special figure 2 reserve designation command, number of times command, variation pattern selection state designation command, special figure phase A designation command and a customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub control board 330 .

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (game ready state), and terminates the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous turning reference example, when the power is normally turned on with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button depressed, the CPU initializes. In the change processing (FIG. 19), 01H (setting change state) is set to the gaming machine state flag. After that, timer interrupt processing is executed, but since 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag, all processing related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-25 in FIG. 23) ) is stopped and configuration related processing is executed.

The setting-related processing is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related processing, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as the setting change operation of the registered set value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) for accepting the setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is one of the setting values provided in a plurality of stages according to the setting change operation. can be switched to

When the setting change switch 180s is turned off while the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change processing is terminated and the gaming machine state flag is set to 00H (playable state). set. As a result, from the next timer interrupt process, the process relating to the progress of the game can be executed.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, after the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, that is, after accepting the operation of changing the setting of the registered setting value, in the subcommand group set processing, the setting value corresponding to the registered setting value is specified. A command is sent to the sub control board 330 . On the other hand, no setting value designation command is transmitted to the sub control board 330 while the setting change operation is being accepted. In this way, the setting value designation command is not transmitted while the setting change operation is being accepted, and the setting value designation command is transmitted when the acceptance of the setting change operation is completed and the state shifts to a state in which the game can be progressed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk of unauthorized acquisition of registered setting values.

Further, in the simultaneous turning reference example, a plurality of flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. Then, when 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag, the setting-related processing can be executed and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since the setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, the setting value designation command is not transmitted while the game is in progress, and the risk of illegally acquiring the registered setting values is reduced. be done.

Next, the switch management process of step S500, the special game management process of step S600, and the normal game management process of step S700 among the timer interrupt processes described above will be described in detail.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart for explaining switch management processing (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch ON is detected, that is, whether the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s is turned ON. As a result, when it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process proceeds to step S510, and when it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300 a executes gate passage processing based on passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . The details of this gate passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal pattern operation opening detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the normal pattern operation opening 125 and the detection signal from the normal pattern operation opening detection switch 125s is turned on. . As a result, if it is determined that the normal pattern operation port detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S510, and if it is determined that the normal pattern operation port detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-5. to move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300 a executes gate passing processing based on the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern operation opening 125 .

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a detects whether the first fixed start opening detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first fixed start opening 120A and a detection signal is input from the first fixed start opening detection switch 120As. judge. As a result, if it is determined that it is time to detect the first fixed starting port detection switch ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that it is not time to detect the first fixed starting port detection switch ON, step S500-7. to process.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting opening passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first fixed starting opening 120A. The details of the first starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a detects whether the first variable starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first variable starting hole 120B and a detection signal is input from the first variable starting hole detection switch 120Bs. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first variable starter detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first variable starter detection switch is not turned on, step S500-9. to process.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting opening passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first variable starting opening 120B. The details of the first starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the second starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 and a detection signal is input from the second starting hole detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-11. to move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300 a executes the second starting hole passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 122 . The details of the second starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a detects when the big winning hole detection switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, the first big winning hole detection switch 126s or the second big winning hole detection switch 126s or the second big winning hole detection switch 126s or the second big winning hole detection switch 126s It is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S540, and if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is not turned on, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S540)
When the main CPU 300a determines whether the game ball has been properly entered into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128, and determines that the game ball has been properly entered. 2, large winning hole passage processing for transmitting a large winning hole entry command indicating the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 to the sub control board 330 is executed. The details of this special winning opening passage processing will be described later.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart for explaining the gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than or equal to the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 4 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is not equal to or higher than the maximum value. The process moves to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage unit for saving the acquired winning determination random number, among the four storage units of the normal-pattern reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in step S510-1 in the target storage section calculated in step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer, and ends the gate passage processing.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart for explaining the first starting opening passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. In addition, the special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the reservation type is special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation, special symbol identification value ( 01H) indicates special 2 reservation.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process, and ends the first starting opening passage process. It should be noted that this special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second start opening passage process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be described after the description of the second start opening passage process.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart for explaining the second starting opening passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process, which will be described later, and ends the second start opening passage process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the above-described first starting opening passing process (step S520) and second starting opening passing process (step S530).

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of target special symbol reserved balls. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. Also, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit. As a result, when it is determined that it is above the upper limit value, the special symbol random number acquisition process is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not above the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section for saving the acquired jackpot decision random number among the storage sections of the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a acquires the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the winning pattern random number updated in step S400-13, and the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69, and obtains the variation pattern random number updated in step S535-11. Store in the target storage unit calculated in .

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure reserve designation command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, based on the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (special 1 reserved number), the special figure 1 reserved designation command is set, and based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (special 2 reserved number) to set the special figure 2 hold designation command. As a result, the number of special 1 reservations and the number of special 2 reservations are transmitted to the sub control board 330 each time special 1 reservations or special 2 reservations are stored.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the result of the big role lottery, the variation pattern number, etc. are provisionally determined, and a prefetch designation command according to the result of the provisional determination is transmitted to the sub control board 330 . This effect determination process at the time of acquisition will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart for explaining effect determination processing (step S536) at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the game state is a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state. Specifically, if the low-probability gaming state, select the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIG. 6), if the high-probability game state, high probability jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIG. 7 ). Then, based on the selected table and the big hit determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13, a special symbol winning temporary determination process is performed to temporarily determine either a big win, a small win or a loss.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol temporary determination process for temporarily determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the temporary major role lottery in step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol per temporary determination process) is a big hit or a small hit, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. The winning symbol random number, the winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win), and the reserved type are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 8) is selected to extract and extract the special symbol determination data. Save the special design determination data (big hit design or small hit design type). In addition, when the result of the provisional key role lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for loss corresponding to the reserved type (type of losing symbol) is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a look-ahead symbol type specification command (a look-ahead specification command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a selects a variation pattern random number determination table according to the special symbol probability state flag, the pending type, the number of variations in the game state, and the special symbol determination data (special symbol type) extracted in step S536-3. , set the selected variation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a tentatively determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table set in step S536-7 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage section in step S535-13.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead specified variation pattern command (pre-read specification command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-9 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the effect determination process at the time of acquisition.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening passage processing (step S540) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S540-1)
When the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-11 that the large winning opening detection switch is turned on, it loads the special game management phase. Although the details will be described later, the special game management phase indicates the stage of special game execution processing, that is, the progress of the special game, and is updated according to the stage of special game execution processing.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the special game management phase loaded in step S540-1 indicates the stage of the execution process above the big winning hole opening pre-process. The special game management phase is provided with 9 stages from 00H to 08H, of which 01H to 08H correspond to the stage of execution processing above the big winning opening opening preprocessing. Since the big winning game or the small winning game is executed when the special game management phase is 01H to 08H, it is determined whether the big winning game or the small winning game is currently being played. If it is determined that the special game management phase indicates a stage of execution processing above the big winning gate opening pre-processing, the process is shifted to step S540-5, and the special game management phase is the big winning gate opening pre-processing. If it is determined that it does not indicate the stage of the above execution process, the process proceeds to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a large winning hole entry command indicating that a game ball has properly entered the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 in the transmission buffer, and ends the big winning hole passage processing. .

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a determines that the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 is inappropriate, executes a predetermined error process, and ends the big winning hole passing process.

FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the special game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the special game triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the normal figure operation port A normal game triggered by the entry of a game ball into 125 progresses in parallel. The special game-related processing is executed step by step and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each of these special game-related processing in a special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for controlling the execution of a special game, and each special game control module is associated with a special game management phase. . Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing "special symbol variation processing" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H". , a module for executing the "pre-processing for opening the big winning gate" is called, and when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H", the "control processing for opening the big winning gate" is executed. is called, and when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H", a module for executing "big winning opening closing effective processing" is called, and the special game management phase is "04H". ' or '08H', a module for executing the 'big prize opening end wait process' is called.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart for explaining the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 and starts processing.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the special game control time, and ends the special game management process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart for explaining special symbol variation processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol variation process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation waiting process. This special symbol variation waiting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Step S620)
The main CPU 300a executes a process during special symbol fluctuation. This process during special symbol fluctuation will be described later using FIG.

(Step S630)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol stop symbol display processing. This special symbol stop symbol display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 35 is a first flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation waiting process (step S610) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example, and FIG. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining design change waiting processing (step S610).

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the interrupted flag is on. Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous spinning reference example, while the first special symbol display 160 is displaying the symbols fluctuating, the second special symbol display 162 may stop displaying the small winning symbols. In this case, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, the small winning game is executed. , After the end of the small winning game, the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 is resumed. The interrupted flag is turned on when the first special symbol display 160 is in the process of changing symbols when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 . Here, if it is determined that the interrupted flag is ON, the process moves to step S610-3, and if it is determined that the interrupted flag is not ON, the process moves to step S610-5.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a executes processing for restarting the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display 160, and shifts the processing to step S610-51 in FIG.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of special 1 reservations is 1 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the number of special 1 reservations is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S610-7, and when it is determined that the number of special 1 reservations is not 1 or more, the process is moved to step S610-51 .

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first special symbol display device 160 is displaying the symbols based on the Special 1 suspension, or whether the symbols based on the Special 1 suspension are being displayed in a stopped state (measurement of stop display time). judge. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display is being performed or that the static display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S610-51, and if it is determined that the variable display is not being performed and the static display is not being performed. The process moves to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the special 1 reserves stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reserve storage area to a storage unit with a lower ordinal number by one. Specifically, the special 1 hold stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 1 hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift process, "1" is subtracted from the counter value of the target special symbol reservation ball number counter corresponding to Special 1 reservation, and "1" is subtracted from Special 1 reservation. Set the hold decrement specification command in the send buffer.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the second special symbol display 162 is displaying symbols in a variable manner. As a result, when it is determined that the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S610-17, and when it is determined that the symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol hit determination process for performing a big winning lottery. This special symbol hitting determination processing will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol determination processing for determining special symbols. Here, if the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number and the reserved type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number judgment table or small winning symbol is loaded. A random number determination table is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of jackpot symbol) is saved. Further, when the result of the big winning lottery in step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for the loss is saved. After saving the special symbol determination data, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol finally stop-displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is a jackpot symbol. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol is a big hit, the process moves to step S610-19, and when it is determined that the symbol is not a big win, the process moves to step S611.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the jackpot decision random number transferred to the 0th storage unit is within the range of the small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is within the small hit range, the process moves to step S610-21, and when it is determined to be outside the small hit range, the process moves to step S610-23.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning symbol random number and the reserved type transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the corresponding small winning symbol random number determination table, extracts the special symbol determination data, and extracts the special symbol determination data (small Type of winning pattern) is saved.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol determination data related to the missing symbols, and sets the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. In other words, when the second special symbol display device 162 finally performs the variable display of symbols in which the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display device 160 always displays a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. Only the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in steps S610-15, S610-21 and S610-23. In addition, the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that is finally lit.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining a variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-27)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation pattern number determined in step S612 and determines the variation time by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the determined variation time is set in the special symbol variation timer.

(Step S610-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big win, and if it is a big win, loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-15 and confirms the type of the big win symbol. do. Then, with reference to the game state setting table and the current game state, to determine the game state and the high probability number of times to be set after the end of the big role game, the number of times of time reduction, the determination result is the special pattern probability state preliminary flag, time reduction state preliminary Save to the flag, high-precision cut spare counter, and time-saving cut spare counter. It should be noted that, when the lost pattern is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in order to start variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display device 160. FIG. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 160, and lighting of the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of symbols is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. As for the special symbol display symbol counter, a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display device 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display device 162 are separately provided. Here, the counter value is set to the special symbol 1 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes a number cutting management process. Here, processing for ending the time-saving gaming state is performed according to the number of fluctuations. This number cutting management process will be described later.

(Step S610-35)
The main CPU 300a sets a frequency command indicating the remaining frequency (actual remaining frequency) until the high probability frequency and the time saving frequency become 0 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-37)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-51)
As shown in FIG. 36, the main CPU 300a determines whether the number of special 2 reservations is 1 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S610-53, and when it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations is not 1 or more, the process is moved to step S610-85 .

(Step S610-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second special symbol display device 162 is displaying the symbols based on the Special 2 suspension, or whether the symbols based on the Special 2 suspension are being displayed in a stopped state (while the stop display time is being measured). judge. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display is being performed or the static display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S610-85, and if it is determined that the variable display is not being performed and the static display is not being performed, step S610. Processing is transferred to -55.

(Step S610-55)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the special 2 reserves stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special reserve reserve storage area to a storage unit with a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the special 2 hold stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 2 hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift process, "1" is subtracted from the counter value of the target special symbol retention ball number counter corresponding to Special 2 suspension, and "1" is subtracted from Special 2 suspension. Set the hold decrement specification command in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-57)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the first special symbol display 160 is displaying symbols in a variable manner. As a result, when it is determined that the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S610-63, and when it is determined that the symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random numbers transferred to the 0th storage unit and the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the state is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state, and creates a corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table. A special symbol hit determination process for storing the lottery result is executed by selecting the lottery.

(Step S610-61)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol determination processing for determining special symbols. Here, if the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number and the reserved type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number judgment table or small winning symbol is loaded. A random number determination table is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of jackpot symbol) is saved. Further, when the result of the big winning lottery in step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for the loss is saved. After saving the special symbol determination data, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-63)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol finally stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is a jackpot symbol. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step S610-65, and when it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step S611.

(Step S610-65)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the jackpot decision random number transferred to the 0th storage unit is within the range of the small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is within the small hit range, the process moves to step S610-67, and when it is determined to be outside the small hit range, the process moves to step S610-69.

(Step S610-67)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning symbol random number and the reserved type transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the corresponding small winning symbol random number determination table, extracts the special symbol determination data, and extracts the special symbol determination data (small Type of winning pattern) is saved.

(Step S610-69)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol determination data related to the missing symbols, and sets the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. In other words, when the first special symbol display device 160 finally performs the variable display of symbols in which the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, the second special symbol display device 162 always displays a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. Only the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner.

(Step S610-71)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in steps S610-61, S610-67 and S610-69.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining a variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-73)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation pattern number determined in step S612 and determines the variation time by referring to the variation time determination table. Then, the determined variation time is set in the special symbol variation timer.

(Step S610-75)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big win, and if it is a big win, loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-61, and selects a big win symbol. Check the type of Then, with reference to the game state setting table and the current game state, to determine the game state and the high probability number of times to be set after the end of the big role game, the number of times of time reduction, the determination result is the special pattern probability state preliminary flag, time reduction state preliminary Save to the flag, high-precision cut spare counter, and time-saving cut spare counter. It should be noted that, when the lost pattern is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-77)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the second special symbol display device 162 in order to start variable display of symbols. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the second special symbol display device 162, and lighting of the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of symbols is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes a number cutting management process, which will be described later.

(Step S610-81)
The main CPU 300a sets a count command indicating the counter value updated in step S610-79 (remaining count until the high-precision count becomes 0) in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-83)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-85)
When neither the first special symbol display device 160 nor the second special symbol display device 162 is performing variable display or stop display of symbols, the main CPU 300a executes a predetermined customer waiting process and waits for the special symbol variation. End the process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol hit determination process (S611) according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registered set value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. As a result, if it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process moves to step S611-11, and if it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process moves to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 03H (set abnormal state).

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (subcommand) in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special symbol hit determination process. When this abnormal setting state command is transmitted to the sub control board 330, notification of the abnormal setting is made.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the big win determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in steps S611-1 and S611-3, and sets the lower limit and upper limit when determining a big win or a small win.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above-described lower and upper limit values, and performs determination processing (big win lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot or small win has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 as determination information, and ends the special symbol winning determination process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the currently set game state and determines whether the normal game state is the time-saving game state. As a result, when it is determined that the normal game state is the time saving game state, the process is moved to step S612-7, and when it is determined that it is not the time saving game state, the process is moved to step S612-5.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a selects and sets a corresponding variation pattern random number determination table based on the current gaming state, the pending type, and the determined special symbol type, and executes variation pattern random number determination table selection processing.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a increments the total variation counter. It should be noted that the total number of fluctuations counter, after the time-saving gaming state is set, the number of fluctuation display of the symbol in the first special symbol display device 160 (first variation number), the number of symbol changes in the second special symbol display device 162 It counts the total number of fluctuations obtained by summing the number of times of fluctuation display (second number of fluctuations) and the number of times of fluctuation display. The total number of times of variation is updated by one each time the symbol variation display is started in the time-saving game state.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the second special symbol display 162 starts to display the symbols in a variable manner. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to start the variable display of the symbols on the second special symbol display device 162, the process is shifted to step S612-11, and when the variable display of the symbols on the second special symbol display device 162 starts. If it is determined that it is not, the process moves to step S612-5.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving gaming state, when the first special symbol display device 160 starts the variation display of the symbols, based on the total number of variations updated in the above step S612-7, the variation pattern random number determination table is selected. The Rukoto.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a increments the second variation counter. In addition, the second variation counter counts the number of symbol variation displays (second variation frequency) on the second special symbol display 162 after the time-saving gaming state is set. This second variation count is updated by 1 each time the second special symbol display 162 starts to display a symbol variation when the time-saving gaming state is set.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second variation count updated in step S612-11 is 4 or less. As a result, if it is determined to be 4 or less, the process moves to step S612-15, and if it is determined to be not 4 or less, the process moves to step S612-5.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when the variation display of the symbol is started on the second special symbol display device 162, and the second variation number is 5 times or more, the total variation number updated in the above step S612-7 A fluctuation pattern random number determination table is selected based on. According to Table I selected at this time, the variation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a selects and sets a special table as a variation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a, based on the variation pattern random number determination table set in step S612-5 or step S612-15 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9 or step S610-55, Determine the variation pattern number.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-17 in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining the number cutting management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of times of time saving, that is, the counter value of the time saving number cutting counter is greater than zero. As a result, when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S613-3, and when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is 0, the number cutting management process is ended.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value (number of times of time saving) has been updated to 0 in step S613-3. As a result, when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is 0, the process proceeds to step S613-7, and when it is determined that the number of times of time saving is not 0, the number cutting management process ends.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the time saving state flag in order to set the normal game state to the non time saving game state. As a result, after the normal game state is set to the time-saving game state, the normal game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state at the start of fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the time-saving number of times (here, 50 times or 100 times). The Rukoto. For example, if it is set to the highly probable portent state, it will be set to the highest priority state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time saving end flag and ends the number cutting management process.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol changing process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value. In addition, the processing target identification value is for identifying whether to execute the processing related to the special 1 suspension or the processing related to the special 2 suspension when executing each of the following processes, When "00H" is set as the processing target identification value, the processing related to Special 1 suspension is executed, and when "01H" is set as the processing target identification value, the processing related to Special 2 suspension is executed. is executed. Various counters and timers appearing in the explanation of the special symbol fluctuation process and the special symbol stop symbol display process are provided for special 1 reservation and special 2 reservation, and the following steps S620-5 to The processing of step S620-23 is performed for the processing object (counter, timer, etc.) corresponding to the processing object identification value stored in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the pending processing target is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162. FIG. As a result, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S620-5, and if the variable display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S620-25.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a executes processing for updating the special symbol variation base counter. In addition, the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is set so as to make one round at a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, Update the counter value to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-5 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process moves to step S620-9, and if the counter value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-13.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol variation timer update process of subtracting a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol variation timer set in step S610-27 or step S610-73.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol variation timer updated in step S620-9 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S620-19, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S620-13.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that counts the lighting time of each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. FIG. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, from the current timer value Update the timer value to the value decremented by "1".

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process is moved to step S620-17, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", step The process moves to S620-25.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and shifts the process to step S620-25. As a result, the segments that make up the 7 segments are sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-25 or S610-71 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 .

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol variation stop time, which is the time during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, in the special game timer.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing object identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, when it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the processing during special symbol fluctuation is terminated, and when it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing is moved to step S620-27.

(Step S620-27)
Main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the process target identification value, and shifts the process to step S620-3.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the special symbol associated with the pending type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. . As a result, when it is determined that the stop display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S630-5, and when it is determined that the stop display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-23 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is moved to step S630-37, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S630. -7 is processed.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big role lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined to be a loss, the process moves to step S630-29, and if it is determined to be not a loss, the process moves to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not there is a special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S631, and if it is determined that there is no special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes symbol forced stop processing. This symbol forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process for updating the game state. Here, the game state is set to the initial state when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a big winning symbol, and when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol, the next processing is performed as it is.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the determined special symbol type.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special electric accessary product maximum number of times setting process. Specifically, referring to the data set in the above step S630-15, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation counter. . It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big winning game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, the current The number of round games is managed. Here, along with the start of the big winning game, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big win game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" when starting a big win game, and updates the special game management phase to "05H" when starting a small win game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase updated in step S630-23 is "01H", that is, whether it is a big win. As a result, when it is determined that the special game management phase is "01H", the process is shifted to step S630-27, and when it is determined that the special game management phase is not "01H", the process proceeds to step S630-29. transfer processing.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal plate 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. By this process, a big hit signal is output with the start of the big win game (opening). Although a plurality of signals are provided to be output from the game information output terminal board 312, only a predetermined jackpot signal will be described here.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state confirmation designation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the time saving end flag is turned on. As described above, the time saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 39 at the start of fluctuation when changing from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state. That is, if the time saving end flag is turned on here, at the time of the 50th or 100th fluctuation start in the high probability omen state, the normal game state is changed from the time saving game state to the non-time saving game state due to the time saving omission is the case. That is, here, it is determined that the time saving end flag is ON only when the fluctuation at the time of time saving time ends. If it is determined that the time saving end flag is ON, the process moves to step S630-33, and if it is determined that the time saving end flag is not ON, the process moves to step S630-37.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300 a performs jackpot signal output stop processing for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312 . That is, the jackpot signal is output during the big win game or during the time saving game state.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time saving end flag.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing object identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, when it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the special symbol stop design display processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing is moved to step S630-39. .

(Step S630-39)
Main CPU 300a adds 01H to the process target identification value, and shifts the process to step S630-3.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining the pattern forced stop processing (step S631) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S631-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol that is being displayed (in question) is a small winning symbol. As a result, when it is determined that it is a small winning pattern, the process is moved to step S631-3, and when it is determined that it is not a small winning pattern, the process is moved to step S631-11.

(Step S631-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing object identification value is 00H, that is, whether the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or not. As a result, if the identification value to be processed is determined to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S631-11, and if it is determined that the identification value to be processed is not 00H, the process proceeds to step S631-5.

(Step S631-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the (other) special symbol during variable display is a jackpot symbol. As a result, when it is determined that it is a jackpot pattern, the process is shifted to step S631-11, and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot pattern, the process is shifted to step S631-7.

(Step S631-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the interrupted flag.

(Step S631-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a fluctuation interruption process for interrupting the fluctuation display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160, and terminates the forced symbol stop process. Here, a process of temporarily saving the remaining time of the fluctuation time and the information related to the special symbol in a predetermined storage area is performed.

(Step S631-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of forcibly stopping the missing symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and terminates the symbol forced stop processing.

By the above processing, when the small winning symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162 is forcibly stopped-displayed the losing symbol. Further, when the small winning design is stop-displayed on the second special design display device 162, if the big winning design is finally stopped and displayed on the first special design display device 160 during the variable display, the first special design display. A lost symbol is displayed on the device 160 for forced stop. On the other hand, when the small winning design is stop-displayed on the second special design display device 162, if the small winning design or the losing design is displayed in the first special design display device 160 finally stop-displaying, the second The variable display on the 1 special symbol display 160 is temporarily interrupted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning hole pre-opening process is executed when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S630-19 or the like is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the processing before opening the big winning opening is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (the start of the round game) to the sub control board 330. FIG.

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes the big winning opening opening/closing switching process. This special winning opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("02H" or "06H"), and terminates the pre-opening processing for the big winning opening.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S641-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the big winning opening during one round game). As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the big winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is shifted to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the special electric role product operating ramset table, and energizes the first big prize opening solenoid 126c and the second big prize opening solenoid 128c based on the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency counter. Solenoid control data for control, and timer data representing the energization time or energization stop time are extracted.

(Step S641-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S641-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, or determines whether to stop the energization. Winning opening solenoid energization control processing is executed. By executing this big winning opening solenoid energization control process, in steps S400-23 and S400-25, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled to start or stop energizing. It will happen.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 in the special game timer. It should be noted that the timer value saved in the special game timer here is the maximum opening time for one time of the big winning opening.

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is energized, that is, in step S641-5, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is turned on. It is determined whether a control process for starting energization has been performed. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the energization start state, the process is moved to step S641-11, and when it is determined that it is not in the energization start state, the special winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the big winning opening opening/closing switching process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning hole opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S641-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is moved to step S650-5, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S650. -3 is processed.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S650-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S641.

(Step S641)
In the above step S650-3, when it is determined that the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of step S641. do.

(Step S650-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the big winning hole winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has reached the specified number. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered. As a result, when it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the big winning opening opening control process is terminated, and when it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a stops the energization of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, and executes the big winning opening closing process necessary to close the big winning opening. As a result, the big winning opening is closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the valid time (interval time) for closing the big winning opening in the special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("03H" or "07H").

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a large winning opening closing designation command indicating that the large winning opening is closed, and ends the special winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart for explaining the large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning opening closing valid process is executed when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S650-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the big winning opening closing effective processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step The process moves to S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation frequency counter matches the counter value of the special electric role product maximum operation frequency counter, that is, whether the preset number of round games has ended. . As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter, the process is moved to step S660-9, and if it is determined that they do not match to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H". In addition, when the special game management phase is 07H, that is, during the control of the small winning game, since the number of round games of the small winning game is "1", it is always determined as YES in the above step S660-3, The process does not move to this step.

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves a predetermined large winning opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the special winning opening closing effective process. As a result, the next round game is started.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in the special game timer.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H").

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special winning opening closing enable process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. This big winning opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is "08H", ie, the end of the small winning game. As a result, when it is determined that the special game management phase is "08H", the process proceeds to step S670-11, and when it is determined that the special game management phase is not "08H", the process proceeds to step S670-5. to move.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a executes state setting processing for setting the game state after the end of the big win game. Here, the game state set in the spare area in step S610-29 or step S610-75, the number of times of high accuracy, and the number of times of time saving are loaded, and the setting of each flag and the counter value are set as the game state after the big win game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the normal game state has been set to the non-time-saving game state in step S670-5. As a result, when it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state has been set, the process proceeds to step S670-9, and when it is determined that the non-time-saving gaming state is not set, the process proceeds to step S670-21.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300 a performs jackpot signal output stop processing for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312 . That is, when the highest priority state is set after the big win game, the output of the big win signal is stopped with the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is a high-probability precursor state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state). As a result, when it is determined that the state is a highly probable portent state, the process proceeds to step S670-13, and when it is determined that the state is not a highly probable portent state, the process proceeds to step S670-21.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the stop-displayed small winning symbol is the special symbol Z1. As a result, when it is determined that it is the special design Z1, the process is moved to step S670-15, and when it is determined that it is not the special design Z1, the process is moved to step S670-21.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a time saving state flag in order to change the normal game state to a non time saving game state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in the high-probability portent state, the game state is changed to the most dominant state at the end of the small winning game.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process for resetting the time saving number counter.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300 a performs jackpot signal output stop processing for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312 . That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and the highest priority state is set after the small winning game is played, the output of the big winning signal is stopped when the small winning game ends.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state to be set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a frequency command corresponding to the high accuracy frequency and the time saving frequency in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, when special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is stored, the variable display of the symbols is resumed.

FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the normal game management phase according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the processing related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball to the normal pattern operation port 125 is stepwise and repeated. Although it is executed, in the main control board 300, each process related to such a normal game is managed by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling execution of a normal game, and each normal game control module is associated with a normal game management phase. . Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", a module for executing the "normal symbol variation waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", A module for executing a "normal symbol fluctuating process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing a "normal symbol stop symbol display process" is called and normal When the game management phase is "03H", a module for executing "ordinary electric accessory winning opening preprocessing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", "normal A module for executing "Electric Accessory Prize Winning Opening Control Processing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "05H", a module for executing "Normal Electric Accessory Prize Winning Opening Closing Effective Processing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart for explaining normal game management processing (step S700) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous spinning reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S700-3 and starts processing.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the normal game control time.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal symbol variation waiting process is normally executed when the game management phase is "00H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal pattern reserved ball number counter is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol variation waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the general pattern reservation (hitting decision random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the general pattern reservation storage area to the storage unit with a lower ordinal number. Specifically, the general map hold stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and transfers the normal pattern suspension stored in the 1st storage unit to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this normal design storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal design reservation ball number counter is decremented by "1", and a normal design reservation reduction designation command is transmitted to indicate that the normal design reservation has subtracted "1". set in the buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects a winning determination random number determination table corresponding to the current game state, performs a general pattern lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp. Let The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is finally lit. is determined, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current game state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S710-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display device 168 in order to start variable display of normal symbols. When the normal symbol display symbol counter is set to, for example, "0" as the counter value, the normal symbol display 168 is controlled to light up, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal symbol is displayed. device 168 is controlled to turn off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of variable display of normal symbols.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sends a normal symbol designation command to the transmission buffer based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S710-7, that is, the symbol type (hit symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol win determination process. set to

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and terminates the normal symbol variation waiting process.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This process during normal symbol fluctuation is normally executed when the game management phase is "01H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S710-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S720-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that times the lighting time and the extinguishing time of the normal symbol display 168 . Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, from the current timer value Update the timer value to the value decremented by "1".

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the processing is shifted to step S720-7, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the The process during normal design fluctuation is ended.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, when the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, the counter value is updated to indicate lighting, and the counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is lit. When it was, it updates to the counter value which shows lights out, and ends the processing during the normal design fluctuation. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeats lighting and extinguishing (blinking) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol fluctuation time.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S710-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to light or extinguish, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time during which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern stop specifying command indicating that the stop display of the normal pattern is started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and terminates the normal symbol changing process.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S720-11 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". The process moves to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the normal drawing lottery.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the general pattern lottery is winning. As a result, if it is determined that it is a hit, the process moves to step S730-9, and if it is determined that it is not a win (it is a loss), the process moves to step S730-7.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and terminates the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the normal game management processing based on one normal pattern reservation is completed, and when the normal pattern reservation is stored, the processing for starting the variable display of the normal pattern based on the next reservation is performed. becomes.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the opening/closing control pattern table, and saves the time before opening the general electric power to the normal game timer as a timer value.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and terminates the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening/closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is started.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S730-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S741.

(Step S741)
The main CPU 300a executes normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B during one opening/closing control). Determine if there is As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741-3. Move.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching counter, the solenoid control data (energization control data or energization control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c. stop control data), and the timer data that is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or the energization stop time of the normal electric accessories solenoid 120c (normal closing effective time = rest time).

(Step S741-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S741-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c, or the normal electric role for stopping the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c. Executes an object solenoid energization control process. By executing this normal electric accessory solenoid energization control process, in steps S400-23 and S400-25, the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c is controlled to start or stop energization.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. In addition, the timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first variable starting port 120B.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c has been performed in step S741-5. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the energization start state, the process is moved to step S741-11, and when it is determined that it is not in the energization start state, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process ends.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory open/close switching frequency counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening control processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S750-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S741-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S750-5, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S750. -3 is processed.

(Step S750-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S750-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741.

(Step S741)
When it is determined in step S750-3 that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of step S741. do.

(Step S750-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9 has reached the specified number, that is, the first variable starting port 120B is under control of opening and closing once. It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum number of possible wins have entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory winning opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S750-7.

(Step S750-7)
The main CPU 300a stops energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c and executes normal electric accessory closing processing necessary to close the first variable starting port 120B. As a result, the first variable starting port 120B is closed.

(Step S750-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal electric valid state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S750-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening control process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid process is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S760-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S750-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S760-3.

(Step S760-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal electric end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S760-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid process.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H", and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when normal pattern suspension is stored, the variable display of normal patterns is resumed. Next, as a reference example of effects, a specific effect that can be executed in the above-described first-class game machine, first-class and second-class game machine, and simultaneous spinning machine, and specific processing related to the effect will be described.

<Production reference example>
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern according to the reference example of effect. As described above, when the main control board 300 carries out the big win lottery, during the variable display of the special symbols, that is, over the time period during which the special symbols fluctuate, the variable performance for notifying the result of the big win lottery is executed. In this variable effect, various background images are displayed in the main effect display section 200a, and effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background image. During the variable effect, along with the image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, sound is output from the audio output device 206, the lighting of the effect lighting device 204 is controlled, and the effect accessory device 202 is turned on. The movement is controlled, but detailed description is omitted here.

The fluctuation production according to the production reference example is roughly divided into a reach-less fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern. In the variation effect of the no-reach variation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are superimposed on the background image and variably displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination indicating that the winning lottery result is lost. In this state, when the variable display of the special symbols is newly performed, three performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed as shown in FIG. (scroll display). Note that the downward white arrows in the drawing indicate that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scroll-displayed in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the effect symbol 210c different from the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, at substantially the same timing as when the special symbol variable display is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, as shown in FIG. 58(e). , and the effect symbol 210b is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big role lottery result by the final stop display mode of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern according to the effect reference example. In the production reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is roughly classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a developed reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern. In the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, similar to the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started along with the start of the variation display of the special symbols, and FIG. As shown, the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the same production pattern 210c as the production pattern 210a is stop-displayed.

In this way, when the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-win manner in which the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are stopped and displayed in the main effect display portion 200a, as shown in FIG. "Reach" is displayed superimposed on 210a and 210c. A plurality of types of ready-to-win modes are provided, and the same performance symbols 210a and 210c marked with any of the numbers "1" to "9" are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(d), the variable display is continued with the shapes of the effect symbols 210a and 210c different from those before the ready-to-win mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(e), finally, a performance symbol 210b different from the performance symbols 210a and 210c is stop-displayed, and the player is notified that the result of the big role lottery is a loss.

FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variable performance of the developed reach variation pattern at the time of losing according to the performance reference example, and FIG. It is a figure explaining. As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to (d) and FIGS. 61(a) to (d), the variation effect of the developed reach variation pattern is similar to the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, in the main effect display section 200a, The effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win mode, and then a ready-to-win development effect is executed in which a predetermined developed image (moving image) is reproduced and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in f) and (g), an image for accomplishing the mission is displayed.

Here, the development images for the ready-to-win development production are roughly divided into a losing pattern and a big win pattern. In the development image of the losing pattern, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(i), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination that notifies a failure. On the other hand, in the development image of the jackpot pattern, as shown in FIG. 61(h), an image showing the success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 210c is stop-displayed with a combination of notifying a big win.

In addition, as described above, the ready-to-reach development production includes, for example, a mission production in which an advanced image of the content of challenging a mission is displayed, and a battle production in which an advanced image in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed. It is The mission presentation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns with different mission contents, and the battle presentation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns with different appearing characters and fighting methods. Further, as described above, the execution pattern of the mission production is roughly divided into a big win pattern for achieving the mission and a losing pattern for failing the mission. It is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern in which a player wins against a player and a losing pattern in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character.

The big hit pattern and the losing pattern have the same content until the final stage of the production, and differ in points such as whether the ally character wins or loses in the end, or whether the mission is accomplished or not. . Therefore, during the ready-to-win development effect, the player cannot identify the result of the big role lottery until the final stage of the variable effect, and the player is given a sense of expectation for a big win.

The big win pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a big win, and the losing pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. However, in one variable production, the reach development production may be executed twice, and in this case, the first reach development production is executed in a losing pattern, and the second reach development production is a losing pattern. Or run in a jackpot pattern. Below, the flow of the effect when the ready-to-win development effect is executed twice in one variable effect will be described.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variable effect when the ready-to-win development effect according to the effect reference example is executed twice. For example, assume that the mission effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 62(a) and (b) after the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-win mode. So far, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but immediately after being informed that the mission could not be achieved, as shown in FIG. , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the main effect display section 200a displays the development image for the battle effect, and the second ready-to-win development effect is started. The developed image for the battle production has a content in which an ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the jackpot is won, the ally character finally wins over the enemy character as shown in FIG. 62(e). , and as shown in FIG. 62(f), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination that notifies a big win. On the other hand, at the time of failure, as shown in FIG. 62(g), the ally character is finally defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. A stop display is displayed in combination.

FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern according to the reference example of effect. As shown in FIG. 63(a), when the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started, as shown in FIG. 210b and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of a plurality of preset pseudo modes. In this pseudo mode, for example, the same production patterns 210a and 210b and a production pattern 210c with a number "2" larger than these production patterns 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo mode, the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is resumed as shown in FIG. 63(c). That is, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows the re-variation display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. After that, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63(e), when the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is resumed, the performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win mode, as shown in FIG. 63(f). After that, as shown in FIGS. 63(g) to (i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the development reach variation pattern, and the player is informed of the result of the winning lottery.

Thus, the variation effect of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern until the production patterns 210a and 210c become the reach mode, and after becoming the reach mode, the development Variation production will proceed in the same manner as the reach variation pattern.

In the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, a plurality of variable display patterns of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c until reaching the reach mode are provided, and the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped for each fluctuation display pattern. The number of times of display, in other words, the number of variable display times of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are different. This variable display pattern is determined by a variable mode command. The selection ratio of the variation mode command at the time of winning the jackpot and at the time of losing is set so that the degree") is high.

Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display times is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display times, When the result of the big role lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variation mode command with a small number of variations display is set higher than the selection ratio of the variation mode command with a large number of variations display.

Further, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the developed reach variation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (fluctuation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player is expected to see more temporary stop displays (variation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. While expecting to be done, we will watch the whereabouts of the production.

The execution pattern of the above-described variation effect is determined and controlled by the sub control board 330 based on the variation pattern command determined by the main control board 300. FIG. That is, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable effect is determined in cooperation with the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330 .

64A and 64B are diagrams for explaining the variable performance determination table according to the performance reference example, FIG. 64A shows the first half variable performance determination table, and FIG. 64B shows the second half variable performance determination table. As described above, when the main control board 300 conducts the big win lottery, the variation pattern commands are determined based on the results of the big win lottery, and each determined command is sent to the sub control board 330 . In the sub-control board 330, when receiving the variation mode command, it acquires a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the first half variation production determination table, and outputs the acquired production random number and the received variation mode command. Based on, the execution pattern of the variable performance in the first half is determined. In addition, when receiving the variation pattern command, it acquires a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the second half variation production determination table, and based on the acquired production random number and the received variation pattern command, The execution pattern of the variable performance in the second half is determined. In addition, in FIG. 64, only a part of the first half variable effect determination table and the second half variable effect determination table are extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 64, according to the first half variation performance determination table, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variation performance is set for each variation mode number (variation mode command), and according to the second half variation performance determination table For example, for each variation pattern number (variation pattern command), the selection ratio for the second half variation performance execution pattern is set. By combining and executing the execution patterns of the determined first half and second half of the variable performance, one variable performance is executed.

As for the variation effect of the reachless variation pattern, "none" indicating that the first half variation effect is not executed is determined as the first half execution pattern, and "normal loss 1" corresponding to the reachless variation pattern is determined as the second half execution pattern. , "Normal Loss 2", "Special Loss 1", and "Special Loss 2" are determined. For example, when receiving a variation mode command corresponding to a variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the first half variation performance is not executed, the sub control board 330 always determines "none" as the first half execution pattern. Also, at this time, in the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time, only one of "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" is determined. A selection ratio is set in the variable effect determination table. Therefore, "none" is determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" are determined as the execution pattern in the second half. The effect execution pattern is determined to be the non-reach variation pattern described above.

On the other hand, for the reach variation pattern variation effects, the first half of the execution pattern is determined to be anything other than "none", and the second half of the execution pattern is determined to be one of the reach development effects (indicated by developments 1 to 5 in the figure). is executed if In other words, in the main effect display section 200a, when the variation effect of the reach variation pattern is executed, the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number other than the variation mode number = 01H is always received, and the variation mode command is received. A variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number for which one of 1 to 5 is determined is received.

Here, in FIG. 64(a), "Normal reach 1", "Normal reach 2", etc. in the first half of the execution pattern, respectively, among the fluctuation effects of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are in the reach mode. More specifically, it shows the changing display patterns of the background image and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c displayed on the main effect display section 200a until the reach development effect is started. These image patterns are designed in advance to coincide with the variable display time of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number. For example, when "normal reach 1" is determined, FIG. The image shown in (d) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 64(a), "pseudo 2a" and the like in the first half of the execution pattern are displayed on the main effect display section 200a until the reach development effect is started among the variable effects of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern. This shows the display pattern of the main fluctuation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed. For example, "pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the number of times of fluctuation display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is two, and that the main fluctuation production image is the display pattern a. showing. In addition, "pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3" in which the number of times of fluctuation display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is 3, and that the main fluctuation production image is the display pattern b. showing.

In addition, in the first half variation performance determination table and the second half variation performance determination table shown in FIG. 64, the variation performance of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big role lottery is a loss. , the selection ratio is set. In addition, the development reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both at the time of loss and at the time of the big hit, but the development reach variation pattern has a higher selection ratio at the time of loss than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, and the jackpot The time selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio at the time of losing and at the time of the big hit, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set with higher reliability than the development reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation patterns, the higher the number of times of simulation, the higher the selection ratio at the time of the big win, and the lower the selection ratio at the time of losing, and the more the number of times of simulation, the higher the reliability is done.

As described above, the rough flow of the variable performance is determined by the variable performance determination table. Execution availability and execution patterns are further determined. Here, the element effect is, for example, the variable display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in the main effect display section 200a, the development image displayed in the main effect display section 200a in the reach development effect, Furthermore, it refers to all effects that constitute variable effects, such as effects that move the effect accessory device 202 . In the embodiment, as an elemental effect that constitutes the variable effect, an advance notice effect (suggestive effect) is executed at various timings during the variable effect.

This notice effect is the start of the variable effect, the re-variation display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in the variable effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, and the main effect display section 200a during the reach development effect. It is an effect such as displaying a predetermined image at the time or moving the effect accessory device 202 at a predetermined timing. A plurality of types of execution patterns are provided for each of the advance notice effects, and for each of the plurality of types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each variation pattern command or variation mode command, in other words, for each whether or not a jackpot is won. An expected value is set for each execution pattern by the selection ratio.

As described above, in the sub-control board 330, when the variation pattern command is received, the execution pattern of the variation performance, whether or not each element performance can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variation performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It will be done. In this way, the variable performance is performed once for one time of variable display of the special symbols, but in the embodiment, the performance over multiple times of variable display of the special symbols is also performed.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect according to the effect reference example. A pending display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main effect display section 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 58 to 63, the holding display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display section 200a during the variable effect and during the game standby. A suspension display effect is performed in the suspension display area 211 during the variable effect. In the pending display effect, the pending display 212a indicating the pending read out to the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the big role lottery, stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure pending storage area A first pending display 212b, a second pending display 212c, a third pending display 212d, and a fourth pending display 212e are displayed in the pending display area 211, respectively, indicating the pending. In the following description, the pending display 212a and the first pending display 212b to the fourth pending display 212e are collectively referred to as the pending display 212. FIG.

For example, when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 reserves are stored in the main RAM 300c, the reserve display 212a and the first reserve display are displayed as shown in FIG. A total of five pending displays 212 from 212b to a fourth pending display 212e are displayed in the pending display area 211. FIG. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the special 1 reservation stored in the first storage unit is read out to the processing area (0th storage unit), and the big win lottery is performed, and the main RAM 300c. When the hold shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are moved to the left by one. . Further, when the next special 1 suspension is read from this state, each suspension display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 65(c). In this way, the pending display effect is an effect of informing the player of the special 1 pending number stored in the main RAM 300c.

In addition, a plurality of display patterns are provided for the pending display 212, and the display colors are different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when the suspension is stored, the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (step S536) is executed, and the variation information determined when the newly stored suspension is read out to the 0th storage unit. to the sub control board 330. In the sub control board 330, when receiving the prefetch designation command, the display pattern of the hold display corresponding to the newly stored hold is determined based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each variation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out in the big role lottery. That is, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to whether or not the jackpot is won and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the display pattern of the pending display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot. It will happen.

FIG. 66(a) is a diagram for explaining the final pending display pattern determination table, and FIG. 66(b) is a diagram for explaining the previous pending display pattern determination table. As described above, in the effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300, the pre-reading designation command indicating the variation mode number and the variation pattern number determined when the newly stored hold is read is sent to the sub control board 330 Send to That is, the prefetch designation command is a command to transmit to the sub control board 330 the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined when the suspension is read. According to the final pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 is set for each prefetching designation command (variation pattern number). The display pattern, that is, the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined.

According to the final pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. Rainbow)” is determined. Then, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before that is determined by referring to the previous pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66(b). determined by According to this one-preceding pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the pending display 212 .

For example, in the main control board 300, when the suspension is stored in the second storage unit of the first special figure suspension storage area, referring to the final suspension display pattern determination table, the final display pattern of the suspension display 212a is determined. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined with reference to the previous pending display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the pending display 212a previously determined. For example, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is "blue", according to the previous pending display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is "flashing" at 200/250. , and "blue" is determined with a probability of 50/250.

After the display pattern of the first reserved display 212b is determined in this manner, the immediately previous reserved display pattern determination table is again based on the previously determined display pattern of the first reserved display 212b. The display pattern of the second pending display 212c is determined with reference to this.

As described above, when the hold is stored, first, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then, based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, the first hold The display patterns are sequentially determined such that the display pattern of the display 212b is determined and the display order is reversed. According to the immediately preceding pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the display pattern of the previously determined pending display 212 or has a low reliability is determined. It is

As described above, in the pending display effect, the pending display 212 is provided with a plurality of display patterns with different expected values for the provision of a predetermined game profit. The pending display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern from the time it is first displayed on the main effect display section 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern may change during the display period. sometimes.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the change in the display pattern of the hold display 212 occurs is that the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as target hold) moves to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It is roughly divided into the timing when the target is held and during the target change effect related to the target hold.

Next, the processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing the variable effect will be described. In addition, below, among the processes in the sub-control board 330, the description of the processes irrelevant to the variation effect will be omitted.

(Sub CPU initialization processing of sub control board 330)
FIG. 67 is a flow chart for explaining the sub-CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b and initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs processing for updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeatedly performs the processing of step S1000-3 until interrupt processing is performed. A plurality of types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is asynchronously updated.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of sub-control board 330)
FIG. 68 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-timer interrupt processing (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). When a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330 a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330 . Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c and performs various processes according to the received commands. In the sub control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, command reception interrupt processing is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the reception buffer. Here, the commands stored in the reception buffer are analyzed by command reception interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and performs a time schedule management process for executing the process corresponding to the time stored in the timetable. Here, based on the time data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or by sending commands to each production device, various productions such as variable production and large role production It will control the execution of the production.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a restores the register and terminates the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart for explaining a read-ahead designation command reception process according to a reference example of effect executed when a read-ahead designation command is received in the command analysis process. As described above, the prefetching designation command (prefetching designation variation pattern command) is set in the main control board 300 in the effect determination process (step S536-11 in FIG. 30), and then the subcommand transmission process (step S536-11 in FIG. It is sent to the sub-control board 330 by step S100-65).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received prefetch designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
Sub CPU 330a stores advance determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1. The sub-RAM 330c of the sub-control board 330 includes a first preliminary determination information storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second preliminary determination corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage area. An information storage unit is provided. The first prior determination information storage section has four storage sections, ie, a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The first to fourth storage units of these first advance determination information storage units correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second prior determination information storage unit includes four storage units, first storage unit to fourth storage unit, and the first storage unit to fourth storage unit of the second prior determination information storage unit are: It corresponds to each of the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area. Here, of the first to fourth storage units in the first special figure reservation storage area or the second special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage unit corresponding to the storage unit in which the new suspension is stored pre-determination information is stored in.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330 a performs final pending display pattern determination processing for determining the final display pattern of the pending display 212 . Here, based on the received prefetch designation command, the final pending display pattern determination table (FIG. 66(a)) is referenced to determine and store the final display pattern of the pending display 212a.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times the display pattern of the pending display 212 is determined, that is, the change timing of the pending display 212, based on the storage unit in which the pending is stored. With reference to (FIG. 66(b)), the display pattern of the pending display 212 is determined. Then, the determined display pattern information of the pending display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process proceeds to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process for starting the display of hold display 212 based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, and ends the prefetch designation command reception process. Thus, when a hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart for explaining a variation pattern command reception process executed when a variation pattern command is received, among the command analysis processes according to the reference example of effect. As described above, the variation pattern command is set in the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612-19 in FIG. 38) in the main control board 300, and then by the subcommand transmission process (step S100-65 in FIG. 20). It is sent to the sub control board 330 .

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-1, determines the execution pattern of the second half of the variable effect. Decide, memorize.

(Step S1220-5)
Sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variation mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-5, determines the execution pattern of the first half of the variable effect. Decide, memorize.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each advance notice effect, and based on the obtained effect random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5. , with reference to each notice effect determination table, the presence or absence of execution of each notice effect and the execution pattern are determined and stored.

(Step S1220-11)
Sub CPU 330a executes shift processing for shifting the prior determination information stored in the prior determination information storage unit. Here, when starting the variable effect based on the special 1 suspension, the advance judgment information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the first advance judgment information storage unit, respectively, the first advance judgment information When shifting to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the storage unit and starting the variable production based on the special 2 hold, the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second advance determination information storage unit is stored. The pre-determination information stored therein is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process for moving the hold display 212 for display. Further, here, when the display pattern of the pending display 212 changes, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data in the timetable based on the determinations made in the above steps, and terminates the variation pattern command reception process. Based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, etc. Production execution control is performed.

<Example>
Next, examples of the present invention will be described. In addition, below, the change from said reference example is demonstrated. In the embodiments described below, unless otherwise specified, they are the same as the above-described reference examples, and the same configurations and processes as those of the above-described reference examples are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the reference examples. Description is omitted.

FIG. 71 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the example. The gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment has a first start port 120 arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered the first game area 116a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the second game area 116b can enter. Two second starting ports 122 are provided. The functions of the two second starting ports 122 are the same, and similarly, when a game ball enters any of the second starting ports 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and special 2 is reserved. can be obtained. Below, in the second game area 116b, the second starting port 122 located relatively upward is called the second starting port 122 above, and the second starting port 122 located relatively downward is the second downward It is called a starting port 122 .

FIG. 72 is a partially enlarged view of the second game area 116b. The lower second starting port 122 is arranged near the bottom of the second game area 116b. The second game area 116b is provided with various winning openings, which will be described later. All enter the second starting hole 122 below.

In addition, a normal electric prize winning opening 123 is provided in the second game area 116b. The normal electric prize winning opening 123 has an upper opening, and a movable piece 123b is provided in this opening. The movable piece 123b can appear and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 108, and is normally held in a closed position protruding to the front side of the game board 108. As shown in FIG. In a state where the movable piece 123b is held at the closed position, the opening of the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is closed, and entry of the game ball into the normal electric winning prize opening 123 becomes impossible.

On the other hand, similarly to the simultaneous reference example described above, when a win is won in a normal game, the movable piece 123b moves to the open position where it is retracted to the back side of the game board 108 . When the movable piece 123b moves to the open position, the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened, and the entry of the game ball into the normal electric winning opening 123 becomes possible. The upper second starting hole 122 is provided in the normal electric winning hole 123 , and all the game balls entering the normal electric winning hole 123 enter the upper second starting hole 122 .

It should be noted that the movable piece 123b is inclined such that the left end thereof is slightly higher than the right end thereof when the gaming machine 100 is viewed from the front. When the movable piece 123b is in the closed position, the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b falls onto the movable piece 123b. The game ball dropped onto the movable piece 123b slowly rolls on the movable piece 123b. During this time, when the movable piece 123b moves to the open position, the game ball on the movable piece 123b enters the normal electric winning hole 123.

The time during which the game ball rolls on the movable piece 123b is, for example, about 1 to 3 seconds. , from the right side of the movable piece 123b, further flows down the second game area 116b.

A large winning opening 126 is provided between the normal electric winning opening 123 and the lower second starting opening 122 . The gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment is provided with one big winning opening 126 . An opening/closing door 126b is provided in the big winning hole 126 so that it can be opened and closed. When the opening/closing door 126b is closed, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 126.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 126b is opened, the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 126.例文帳に追加

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the internal configuration of the big winning opening 126. As shown in FIG. A structure 126x projecting to the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 126x has an opening formed in the upper part, and this opening becomes the big prize winning opening 126. FIG. An opening/closing door 126b is provided on the upper portion of the structure 126x, and normally, as shown in FIG.

The opening/closing door 126b projects into the second game area 116b so as to face the gaming machine 100 above. Therefore, when the open/close door 126b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b rolls on the open/close door 126b. Here, the opening/closing door 126b maintained in the closed state is inclined so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 126b is in the closed state, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. will move.

Then, when the big win game is executed, the opening/closing door 126b changes to an open state in which the big winning opening 126 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the opening/closing door 126b appears and disappears in the front-rear direction of the game machine 100 through a hole formed in the game board 108 by an actuator (solenoid) (not shown).

Normally, the actuator is kept in a non-energized state, and the opening/closing door 126b is held at a position protruding forward from the hole of the game board 108 to close the big winning opening 126.例文帳に追加Then, when the actuator is energized, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the opening/closing door 126b is held at a position recessed behind the hole of the game board 108, and the big prize opening 126 is opened. In this way, when the big winning hole 126 is opened, the game ball enters the big winning hole 126.例文帳に追加

A lead-out path 126 d is provided inside the big winning opening 126 . The bottom portion of the big winning opening 126 is inclined so that the game ball entering the big winning opening 126 is guided to the lead-out path 126d. The lead-out path 126d is provided with a variable probability area 140a and a non-variable probability area 140d formed of holes through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball that enters the big winning opening 126 passes through the variable probability area 140a and the non-variable probability area. 140 d and discharged to the back side of the game board 108 .

The large winning opening 126 is provided with a movable member 140b for opening and closing the variable probability area 140a and the non-variable probability area 140d. This movable member 140b switches between a state in which entry of the game ball into the variable probability region 140a is possible and a state in which entry of the game ball into the variable probability region 140a is disabled by its movement (slide). More specifically, when the movable member 140b shifts to the position shown in FIG. 73(c), the non-variable probability region 140d is closed by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the variable probability region 140a.

On the other hand, when the movable member 140b shifts to the position shown in FIG. 73(d), the probability variable region 140a is blocked by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the non-probability variable region 140d. Details will be described later, but when the game ball enters the probability variable region 140a during a predetermined round game (hereinafter referred to as a specific round game) of the big role game, the gaming state after the end of the big role game is a high probability game state, and when the game ball does not enter the variable probability region 140a during the specific round game, the game state after the end of the big win game is set to the low probability game state.

Returning to FIG. 72 , a gate 124 is provided above the normal electric prize winning opening 123 . A first non-electrical winning device 127 and a second non-electrical winning device 129 are provided in the second game area 116b. The first non-electrical winning device 127 includes a first non-electrical winning opening 127a and a movable piece 127b for opening and closing the first non-electrical winning opening 127a. 129a, and a movable piece 129b for opening and closing the second non-electrical winning opening 129a.

The movable piece 127b shifts to an open state by a game ball entering the upper second starting hole 122, and shifts to a closed state by entering two game balls into the first non-electrical winning hole 127a. Similarly, the movable piece 129b is shifted to the open state by the game ball entering the upper second starting hole 122, and closed by two game balls entering the second non-charging prize hole 129a. transition.

FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129. FIG. In FIG. 74, and FIGS. 75 and 76 described below, the structure of the back side of the game board 108 seen from the front side of the game board 108 is indicated by a solid line. It is indicated by a dashed line. 74 shows the closed state of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129. As shown in FIG. A game ball drop passage 144 is provided on the back surface of the game board 108 . All the game balls entering the upper second starting port 122 are guided to the game ball drop passage 144. - 特許庁The game ball drop passage 144 extends downward from the upper second start port 122, and the game ball entering the upper second start port 122 is dropped into the game ball drop passage on the back side of the game board 108. 144 falls downward due to its own weight.

The first non-electrical winning device 127 includes a collision plate 127c, a gear mechanism 127d, a rocking plate 127e, a locking member 127f, and a biasing member 127g in addition to the first non-electrical winning port 127a and the movable piece 127b. . The collision plate 127c is provided in the game ball drop passage 144, and the game balls falling from the upper second starting port 122 collide.

The gear mechanism 127d has three gears that are meshed with each other. Here, the three gears that constitute the gear mechanism 127d are called the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear in order from the left side of FIG. A collision plate 127c is attached to the rotating shaft of the first gear. The first gear and the collision plate 127c rotate together.

A rocking plate 127e is provided on the rotating shaft of the third gear. The rotating shaft of the third gear passes through the game board 108 and extends to the front side of the game board 108 . A movable piece 127b is attached to a portion of the rotation shaft of the third gear that protrudes forward from the game board 108 . Therefore, the third gear, rocking plate 127e and movable piece 127b rotate together. The rotating shaft of the third gear is provided on the lower left side of the first non-electrical winning opening 127a, and a locking member 127f is provided on the right side of the rotating shaft of the third gear while maintaining a gap.

The locking member 127f is provided so as to be able to swing around its right end in the drawing. Further, an urging member 127g composed of, for example, a tension spring is attached to the locking member 127f. The locking member 127f is generally held horizontally by a biasing member 127g, as shown in FIG.

Also, the second non-electrical winning device 129 is provided below the first non-electrical winning device 127 . The second non-electrical winning device 129 includes a collision plate 129c, a gear mechanism 129d, a rocking plate 129e, a locking member 129f, and a biasing member 129g in addition to the second non-electrical winning port 129a and the movable piece 129b. . The collision plate 129c is provided in the game ball drop passage 144, and the game balls falling from the upper second starting port 122 collide.

The gear mechanism 129d has three gears that are meshed with each other. Here, the three gears forming the gear mechanism 129d are called first gear, second gear, and third gear in order from the left side of FIG. A collision plate 129c is attached to the rotating shaft of the first gear. The first gear and the collision plate 129c rotate integrally.

A swing plate 129e is provided on the rotating shaft of the third gear. The rotating shaft of the third gear passes through the game board 108 and extends to the front side of the game board 108 . A movable piece 129b is attached to a portion of the rotating shaft of the third gear that protrudes forward from the game board 108 . Therefore, the third gear, rocking plate 129e and movable piece 129b rotate together. The rotation shaft of the third gear is provided on the lower left side of the second non-electrical winning opening 129a, and a locking member 129f is provided on the right side of the rotation shaft of the third gear while maintaining a gap.

The locking member 129f is provided so as to be able to swing around its right end in the drawing. Further, an urging member 129g composed of, for example, a tension spring is attached to the locking member 129f. The locking member 129f is generally held horizontally by a biasing member 129g, as shown in FIG.

FIG. 75 is a first diagram for explaining the operation of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129, and FIG. It is a second diagram for explaining the operation of . The game ball entering the upper second starting port 122 collides with the collision plates 127c and 129c in the process of falling down the game ball drop passage 144.例文帳に追加When the game balls collide with the collision plates 127c and 129c, the first gears of the gear mechanisms 127d and 129d are rotated as shown in FIG.

As the first gear rotates, the second and third gears rotate. Rotation of the third gear rotates the rocking plates 127e and 129e in the counterclockwise direction in the drawing about the rotation axis of the third gear. Here, in FIG. 75, the second non-electrical winning device 129 is shown in the open state, and the first non-electrical winning device 127 is shown in the middle of the operation from the closed state to the open state. When the collision plates 127c, 129c and the rocking plates 127e, 129e rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the game balls falling down the game ball drop passage 144, the tips of the rocking plates 127e, 129e engage the locking members 127f, 129f. come into contact with

The rocking plates 127e and 129e further rotate counterclockwise while pushing up the left ends of the locking members 127f and 129f. Then, when the rocking plates 127e and 129e reach a predetermined angle, the contact with the locking members 127f and 129f is released, and the locking members 127f and 129f return to their original positions. In the open state of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129, it is opened like the movable piece 129b shown in FIG. It is possible to enter a game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76, in the open state of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129, the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b enters the second non-electrical winning opening 129a. Suppose you hit a ball. At this time, the game ball entering the second non-electrical winning hole 129a is guided onto the swing plate 129e on the back side of the game board 108.例文帳に追加When the game ball is placed on the swing plate 129e, the swing plate 129e rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball, and the swing plate 129e comes into contact with the locking member 129f from above.

A counterclockwise rotating force acts on the locking member 129f from the rocking plate 129e, and at the same time, a clockwise biasing force acts from the biasing member 129g. At this time, the elastic force of the biasing member 129g is set so as to roughly balance the weight of one game ball. Therefore, as in the second non-electric winning device 129 of FIG. 76, in a state where one game ball is placed on the swing plate 129e, the swing plate 129e is locked by the locking member 129f and rotates clockwise. is suppressed.

Then, like the first non-electric winning device 127 in FIG. 76, when two or more game balls are placed on the swing plate 127e, the swing plate 127e rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game balls. As a result, the game ball entering the first non-electrical winning hole 127a falls downward, and the first non-electrical winning device 127 shifts to the closed state shown in FIG.

As described above, the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129 shift from the closed state to the open state when one game ball enters the upper second starting port 122 . When two game balls enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a, the opening state is changed to the closed state. That is, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when one game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123, a total of four It is possible to enter a game ball.

The configurations of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129 are merely examples. If the first non-electrical winning opening 127a or the second non-electrical winning opening 129a is opened based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 122 or the normal electric winning opening 123, the structure is particularly limited. not. Also, for example, when two or more game balls enter the second starting hole 122 or the normal electric winning hole 123, the first non-electric winning hole 127a or the second non-electric winning hole 129a may be opened. .

Also, in the embodiment, when two game balls enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a or the second non-electrical winning opening 129a, the first non-electrical winning device 127 or the second non-electrical winning device 129 It was decided to shift to the closed state. However, when one game ball enters or three or more game balls enter, the first non-electric winning device 127 or the second non-electric winning device 129 may shift to the closed state. .

Furthermore, only one of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129 may be provided, and the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129 may be Three or more may be provided. When a plurality of first non-electrical winning devices 127 or second non-electrical winning devices 129 are provided, the number of game balls that can be entered in one opening may differ from each other.

FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the embodiment. The main control board 300 includes a general winning hole detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 118, and a first starting hole for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 120. Detection switch 120s, two second start hole detection switches 122s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start hole 122, gate detection switch 124s for detecting that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, and a big winning hole 126, a large winning opening detection switch 126s for detecting that a game ball has entered the first non-electrical winning opening 127a, a first non-electrical winning opening detection switch 127s for detecting that a game ball has entered the first non-electrical winning opening 127a, a second non-electrical winning opening detection switch 127s A second non-electric winning prize opening detection switch 129s for detecting that a game ball has entered the electric winning prize opening 129a, and a probability variable region detection switch 140s for detecting that a game ball has entered the probability variable region 140a are connected. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each detection switch.

Although not shown, the second starting port detection switch 122s is provided in each of the upper second starting port 122 and the lower second starting port 122 .

The main control board 300 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 123c that operates the movable piece 123b of the normal electric prize winning opening 123, and a big winning opening solenoid 126c that operates the opening/closing door 126b that opens and closes the first big winning opening 126. , and a movable member solenoid 140c that operates a movable member 140b that opens and closes the variable probability region 140a are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the normal electric winning port 123, the big winning port 126, and the variable probability region 140a. It has become so. Other configurations of the control means are the same as those of the simultaneous rotation reference example.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-65535. A big win determination random number determination table is selected according to the game state when the big win lottery is started, and the big win determination random number determination table and the acquired big win determination random number are used to perform the big win determination random number.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the big win lottery is started for special 1 suspension and special 2 suspension, the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the embodiment, six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each setting value. During the game, the set value is set to one of six levels, and the low-probability jackpot decision random number judgment corresponding to the currently set set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) A lottery for major roles is conducted with reference to the table.

In the low-probability gaming state, when set value = 1 (registered set value = 1), with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10312, it is determined as a jackpot, and when it is other jackpot determination random numbers, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/210.0.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6, it is important to refer to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f shown in FIGS. 78(b) to (f). A lottery will be held. According to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination tables bf, the jackpot probabilities are about 1/204.8 to 186.1, respectively.

FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a high probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. In the high-probability gaming state, when the big win lottery is started for special 1 suspension and special 2 suspension, the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to.

In the high-probability gaming state, when set value = 1 is set (registered set value = 1), with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. is done. According to this high probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10384, it is determined as a jackpot, and when it is other jackpot determination random numbers, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is approximately 1/170.6.

In the high probability gaming state, when the set value is set to 2 to 6, it is important to refer to the high probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f shown in FIGS. 79(b) to (f). A lottery will be held. According to the high probability jackpot determination random number determination tables bf, the jackpot probabilities are about 1/167.1 to 154.5, respectively.

Thus, in the embodiment, unlike the simultaneous turning reference example, a small win is not provided, and only a big win is provided. However, in the same manner as in the above-described simultaneous spinning reference example, a small win may be provided in the embodiment as well. Also, here, the probability of winning the jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different according to the registered set value. Only the probability of winning may differ according to the registered set value. Furthermore, the registration set value is not essential, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state may always be constant.

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment. The winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the winning symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained from within the range of 0-99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the big win lottery, the type of special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, when the "big win" is won by the special 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the winning symbol random number determination table for special 1 is selected, and when the "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the winning symbol random number determination table for special 2 is selected.

According to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 80 (a) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. As shown, the jackpot symbols (special symbols A to D) are determined as the special symbols. Specifically, according to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table, the special symbol A is determined when the per symbol random number is 0 to 49, and the special symbol when the per symbol random number is 50 to 74 B is determined, and when the winning symbol random number is 75-99, the special symbol C is determined. Therefore, when the jackpot is won based on the special 1 reservation, the probability of determining each jackpot pattern is 50% for the special pattern A and 25% for the special patterns B and C respectively. On the other hand, according to the winning symbol random number determination table for special 2, the special symbol D is determined regardless of the value of the winning symbol random number.

FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining a special electric accessory actuation ramset table according to the embodiment. The special electric accessory actuation ram set table according to the embodiment is used in place of the special electric accessory actuation ram set table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. In addition, the special electric accessory operating ram set table stores various data for controlling the big win game. The solenoid 126c is energized and controlled. In fact, a plurality of special electric role product actuating ramset tables are provided for each type of special symbol (jackpot symbol). Although it is set, here, for convenience of explanation, the control data of the special design is shown for each type of design.

As shown in FIG. 81, the big win game consists of a plurality of round games in which the big winning opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. According to this special electric role product operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started), the maximum number of times of special electric role product operation (round game executed during one big role game number of times), the number of times of opening and closing the special electric accessory (the number of times the large winning opening 126 is opened during one round), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the large winning opening solenoid 126c for each opening number of the large winning opening 126, that is, 1 opening time of the big winning mouth 126), specified number (maximum number of possible winnings to the big winning mouth 126 in one round game), effective time to close the big winning mouth (closure time of the big winning mouth 126 between round games) That is, the interval time), the ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game to the restart of the normal special game (fluctuation display of symbols to be described later)) are the control data for the special symbols. Each type is stored in advance as illustrated.

When a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and a special pattern A is determined as a jackpot pattern, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. In this big win game, the big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the first to fourth round games. In the first to third round games, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds at maximum, and in the fourth round game, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 0.1 second. When a prescribed number of game balls enter the large winning opening 126 or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the large winning opening 126 is closed and one round game ends. Become.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by special 1 reservation and special symbols B and C are determined as jackpot symbols, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. In these big win games, the big winning opening 126 is opened only once in the 1st to 4th round games. In each round game, the large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the large winning opening 126 is closed to end one round of play.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by special 2 reservation and a special pattern D is determined as a jackpot pattern, a big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed. In these big win games, the big winning opening 126 is opened only once in the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this time, or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the large winning opening 126 is closed to end one round of play.

FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the opening/closing mode of the big winning opening 126 and the opening/closing mode of the probability variable region 140a by the movable member 140b. In the embodiment, the fourth round game is set as a specific round game, and when the game ball entering the big winning opening 126 during the fourth round game enters the probability variable region 140a, the game after the big role game The state becomes a high probability game state. As shown in FIG. 82, the movable member 140b, in the fourth round game, simultaneously with the opening of the large winning opening 126, momentarily (about 0.1 seconds) after opening the variable probability region 140a, over a predetermined time, The region 140a is kept closed, and then the variable probability region 140a is kept open again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the special symbol A is determined, the big winning opening 126 is opened only for 0.1 second from the start of the fourth round game. During this time, even if a game ball enters the big winning hole 126, it takes a predetermined time for the game ball to reach the variable probability area 140a. Therefore, when the game ball entering the big winning opening 126 reaches the probability variable region 140a, the probability variable region 140a is always closed, and as a result, when the special symbol A is determined and the big role game is executed , The game ball does not enter the probability variable region 140a.

In addition, if an unexpected situation occurs, such as a game ball getting caught in the big winning hole 126, or a game ball staying in the big winning hole 126 for a long time for some reason. , there is a possibility that the game ball enters the probability variable region 140a even in the big win game in which the special symbol A is determined and executed. Therefore, in this specification, the terms “always” and “certainly” are used to facilitate understanding, but this means that the state of the gaming machine 100 changes when the game progresses. It does not imply 100% physical, assuming proper condition and no unforeseen circumstances.

On the other hand, when the special symbols B, C, and D are determined and the big winning game is executed, the big winning opening 126 is opened once for 29.0 seconds from the start of the fourth round game. . Therefore, there is a possibility that about 1 to 2 game balls entering the big winning hole 126 at the same time as opening the big winning hole 126 cannot enter the probability variable area 140a, but after that, they enter the big winning hole 126. The entered game ball can surely enter the variable probability area 140a.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the big win game according to the embodiment. The game state setting table according to the embodiment is used instead of the game state setting table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. In the embodiment, when a big win game is executed, depending on the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol), the presence or absence of passage (entering) of the game ball to the probability variable area 140a, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state setting table to set the game state after the end of the big win game.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the game ball does not enter the variable probability area 140a in the specific round game, regardless of the type of the special symbol, the game state after the big win game is set to the low probability game state. Further, when the game ball enters the probability variable area 140a in the specific round game, regardless of the type of the special symbol, the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability game state. When the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability game state, the high probability number of times is set to 150 times. That is, when the high-probability game state is set, the game state is changed to the low-probability game state when the big winning lottery is executed 150 times.

In addition, in the embodiment, in addition to the special game state (low-probability game state and high-probability game state) in which the winning probability of the jackpot related to the special game is defined, the normal game in which the winning probability of the normal game is defined State is set. Here, as the normal game state, a non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state are provided. The normal game state will be described later, but hereinafter, the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are collectively referred to as the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the big win game is executed, the game state after the big win game is set to the time saving game state regardless of the type of the special symbol and whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability region 140a. be done. Specifically, when the special symbols A, B, and C are determined, the normal game state after the big win game is set to the A time-saving game state. At this time, the time saving number indicating the number of continuation times of the A time saving game state varies depending on the type of special symbol, whether or not the game ball enters the probability variable region 140a, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the like.

Here, as the number of times of time saving, the special number of times of time saving and the total number of times of time saving are set. The number of special 2 time reduction shows the number of times of the big role lottery based on the special 2 hold until the time saving game state ends, and the total number of time saving times is the number of times of the big role lottery based on the special 1 hold until the time saving game state ends , and the total number of times of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation. The number shown in the column of the number of times of reduced working hours in FIG. 83 indicates the number of times of reduced working hours, and the number in parentheses indicates the total number of reduced hours of work.

For example, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variable region 140a during the specific round game, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, Special 2 The number of times of time saving is set to 100 times, and the total number of times of time saving is set to 104 times. In addition, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variable region 140a during the specific round game, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability game state and a game state other than the non-time-saving game state. For example, the special 2 time saving frequency is set to 183 times, and the total time saving frequency is set to 187 times.

In addition, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, the number of times of special 2 time reduction is set to 150 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the total time reduction is performed. The number of times is set to 154 times.

In addition, when the special symbols B and C are determined and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, the special 2 hour reduction number of times is set to 183 regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. and the total number of time reductions is set to 187 times. On the other hand, when the special symbols B and C are determined and the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the special 2 hour reduction number of times is set to 150 times, The total number of time reductions is set to 154 times.

Further, when the special symbol D is determined and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, the normal game state after the big win game is set to the A time saving game state. At this time, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, as the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state, the number of times of special time saving is set to 183 times, and the total number of times of time saving is set to 187 times.

On the other hand, when the special symbol D is determined and the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a during the specific round game, the normal game state after the big win game is set to the B time saving game state. At this time, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times of shortening time in the B time saving game state is set to 2, and the total number of times of shortening time is set to 6 times.

As described above, as a condition until the A reduced working hours gaming state and the B reduced working hours gaming state are completed, the number of times of the big role lottery based on the special 2 hold reaches a predetermined number, and based on the special 1 hold and special 2 hold It is set that the total number of times of the big winning lottery reaches a predetermined number of times. At this time, the total number of times of time saving is set four times more than the number of times of special 2 time saving.

In the gaming machine according to the embodiment, similarly to the above-described simultaneous spinning reference example, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 160 and the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 162 are simultaneously performed in parallel. can be performed. Therefore, if special 1 suspension is stored in a time-saving game state in which a major role lottery based on special 2 suspension should be executed, a major role lottery based on special 1 suspension is executed. By setting the total number of times of time saving to be larger than the number of times of special time saving, regardless of the number of special 1 reservations when shifting to the time saving game state, the lottery for major roles based on special 2 reservations is executed a specified number of times in the time saving game state. becomes possible.

Further, here, as a condition until the B time-saving gaming state is completed, it is further included that the variation display of the normal symbols is executed once. Therefore, after the B time-saving game state is set, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the B time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. In addition, here, the B time-saving gaming state is terminated by the start of the variable display of normal symbols, but for example, the variable display of normal symbols has ended a predetermined number of times, the winning of a predetermined number of times in a normal game, The fact that the normal electric winning opening 123 has been opened a predetermined number of times may be set as the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state. In addition, at a predetermined timing during variable display of normal symbols, the start, end, and predetermined timing of stop display of normal symbols, the start and end of auxiliary games, and the predetermined timing during auxiliary games B time-saving game state may terminate.

In addition, as described above, whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a actually depends on the type of special symbol that defines the opening/closing mode of the big winning opening 126 in the specific round game. If the game is played appropriately, when the special symbol A is determined, the game ball does not enter the probability variable area 140a during the specific round game, and the special symbols B, C, and D are determined. , during a specific round game, it is possible to make sure that the game ball enters the variable probability region 140a. Therefore, assuming that the game is properly played, after the big win game, the game state is set as indicated by the thick line box in FIG. In other words, it can be said that the game states other than those enclosed by the thick line in FIG. 83 are the game states set when the irregularity occurs. Below, the game when the game is played properly will be explained, and the explanation of the game when the irregularity occurs will be omitted.

FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining a winning determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The winning determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used in place of the winning determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous spinning reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124, the normal pattern determination process associated with whether or not the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning prize port 123 is energized, that is, the normal pattern lottery is performed. .

When the game ball passes through the gate 124, one hit determination random number is acquired from within the range of 0 to 99, and this random value is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c with an upper limit of 4. remembered. When the normal game state is a non-time-saving game state, when the normal drawing lottery is started, as shown in FIG. 84(a), the non-time-saving game state hit determination random number determination table is referred to. According to this non-time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost pattern is determined as the type of the normal pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. When a winning pattern is determined in this normal drawing lottery, the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is controlled to be opened, and when a losing pattern is determined, the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is closed. maintained in condition.

In addition, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the A time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the A time saving game state hit determination random number determination table is referred to. According to this A time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost pattern is determined as the type of the normal pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the A time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100.

In addition, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the B time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 84(c), the B time saving game state hit determination random number determination table is referred to. According to this B time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 99, the hit design is determined as the normal design type. In other words, in the B time-saving gaming state, the winning pattern is always determined by the normal drawing lottery.

In addition, the above winning probability in the general drawing lottery is only an example. For example, even in the B time-saving gaming state, it may be set so that a losing pattern is determined with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 85(a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol variation time data table according to the embodiment, and FIG. 85(b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment. The normal symbol variation time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment are used instead of the normal symbol variation time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the simultaneous turning reference example. According to the normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the embodiment, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and the game state is set to the A time-saving game state. In this case, the variable time is determined to be 5 seconds, and when the game state is set to the B time-saving game state, the variable time is determined to be 1 second. When the variable time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is variable-displayed (blinking-displayed) over the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is lit, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is extinguished.

Then, when the winning pattern is determined by the normal drawing lottery and the normal pattern display 168 is lit, the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning opening 123 is changed to the opening and closing control pattern as shown in FIG. 85(b). Power supply is controlled by referring to the table. Actually, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and according to the game state when the normal pattern is determined, the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c. .

According to the opening and closing control pattern table according to the embodiment, the normal electric opening pre-opening time (waiting time until opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is started), the normal electric accessory maximum opening/closing switching frequency (normal electric winning opening 123 Number of openings), solenoid energization time (energization time of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c for each number of times the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is opened, that is, opening time of the normal electric winning prize port 123 once), specified number (ordinary electric winning prize opening 123 is fully opened, the maximum number of prizes that can be won to the normal electric winning opening 123), normal electric closing effective time (closure time between each opening of the normal electric winning opening 123, that is, pause time), normal electric effective state time ( Waiting time from the end of the last opening of the normal electric winning prize port 123), normal electric end wait time (waiting time until the fluctuation display of the normal pattern to be described later is resumed after the normal electric valid state time has elapsed) is normal As control data for the electric winning port 123, it is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each game state.

The opening/closing condition of the normal electric winning prize opening 123 defines three elements: winning probability of normal symbols, variable display time of normal symbols, and opening time of the normal electric winning prize opening 123 . In other words, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of normal symbols, the time of variable display of normal symbols, and the opening time of the normal electric winning opening 123, in each of the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, and B time-saving game state, It is possible to set the frequency of game balls entering the normal electric winning hole 123 and the rate of shot prize balls. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only an example, and at least the B time-saving game state is compared to the non-time-saving game state or the A time-saving game state, and the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123. All you have to do is combine three elements to make it easier to hit the ball.

FIG. 86 is a diagram explaining a game state according to the embodiment. As described above, in the embodiment, the special game state and the normal game state are combined into one game state. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the game state combining the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state is called a normal state, and the game state that combines the low-probability game state and the A time-saving game state is a low-probability game state. Called time saving state, game state combining high probability game state and non time saving game state, and game state combining high probability game state and A time saving game state are called probability variable state, high probability game state and B time saving game A game state in which states are combined is called a specific state.

As described above, in the non-time-saving game state and the A time-saving game state, only the variable display time of normal symbols is different. In the non-time-saving game state and the A time-saving game state, since the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is 1/100, almost no game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123.例文帳に追加Therefore, it can be said that the normal state, the low probability short working hours state and the probability variable state are gaming states in which the normal electric winning opening 123 is almost closed. Also, here, if the variable probability state, the game progresses in the same way when the normal game state is set to the non-time-saving game state and when it is set to the A time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving game state, since the probability of winning the normal drawing lottery is 100/100, the game ball can surely enter the normal electric winning hole 123. However, as described above, the B time-saving gaming state ends when the variable display of normal symbols is executed once. Strictly speaking, the B time-saving gaming state ends when the variable display of normal symbols is started once. Therefore, when the specific state is set and the variable display of the normal symbols is executed once, the B time-saving game state immediately becomes the non-time-saving game state, and the game state shifts to the probability variable state. When shifting to the variable probability state, as described above, the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is almost closed, and almost no game ball enters the normal electric winning prize opening 123 .

In addition, the opening and closing control pattern of the normal electric winning prize port 123 is determined based on the normal game state when the normal drawing lottery is executed. Therefore, when the normal drawing lottery is executed in the B time-saving game state, and when the normal drawing drawing is won, the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is 0.00 regardless of the game state during the opening/closing control of the normal electric winning prize opening 123. The 16-second release is repeated 10 times (see FIG. 85).

Therefore, when the specific state is set after the big win game, the auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is opened 10 times is executed only once, but the game state during this auxiliary game is a probability variable state. ing.

Also, in the first special symbol display device 160, the variation time in which the symbol variation display based on the special 1 suspension is performed, and in the second special symbol display device 162, the variation in which the symbol variation display based on the special 2 suspension is performed The time is set according to the game state as shown in FIG. 86(b). For example, in the normal state, the variable time determined based on the Special 1 suspension is set to 3 seconds to 100 seconds, and the variable time determined based on the Special 2 suspension is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, in the normal state, the big role lottery and the fluctuation display of the pattern based on the special 1 hold (hereinafter referred to as special 1 fluctuation) are subject to real fluctuation, and the big role lottery and the fluctuation display of the pattern based on the special 2 hold (hereinafter, special 2 variation) are treated as irregular. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to perform a so-called left-handed stroke in order to enter the game ball into the first start hole 120, and cause the game ball to flow down to the first game area 116a.

In addition, in the low probability short time state, the probability variable state and the specific state, the fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation is shorter than the normal state. Special 2 fluctuations are more advantageous than special 1 fluctuations, so in low probability short time state, probability variable state and specific state, special 2 fluctuations are subject to real fluctuations, special 1 fluctuations are treated as irregular ones. In this way, due to the fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation and special 2 fluctuation, as shown by the thick line in FIG. 2 fluctuations are subject to real fluctuations.

In addition, when it is set to the specific state (high probability game state and B short game state) after the big win game, it is set to the special fluctuation period. This special fluctuation period is a period in which the fluctuation pattern random number determination table to be selected is defined for each number of special 2 fluctuations after the big win game. As described above, when the normal drawing lottery is executed in a specific state (high probability game state and B time reduction game state), the B time reduction game state ends and becomes a non-time reduction game state, so the probability variable state (high probability game state and non-time-saving game state). Therefore, the special fluctuation period, when set to the specific state after the big win game, will be set across from the specific state to the definite variable state.

The first variation time of the special 2 variation in the special variation period is always determined to be 10 seconds. Also, the second variation time of the special 2 variation in the special variation period is always determined to be 10 seconds if the result of the big win lottery is a big win. On the other hand, the second fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation in the special fluctuation period is determined as follows depending on the number of special 1 reserves at the start of the fluctuation when the result of the big win lottery is a loss.

That is, at the start of the second variation of the special 2 variation in the special variation period, if the special 1 suspension is less than 2 (0 or 1), the variation time is always determined to be 70 seconds. On the other hand, if there are two or more Special 1 reserves at the start of the second special 2 fluctuation in the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In addition, in the special 2 fluctuation after the third time in the special fluctuation period, the same fluctuation pattern random number determination tables K and L as those in the high probability game state and the A short time game state are selected. According to this table, if the result of the big role lottery is a loss, the variable time is determined to be 2 to 30 seconds, and if the result of the big role lottery is a big win, the variable time is determined to be 30 to 50 seconds.

Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game property according to the embodiment. Here, a case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the normal state. In the normal state, since the actual variation target is set to special 1 variation, the player first shoots the game ball toward the first game area 116a. As shown in FIG. 87(a), the probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state is approximately 1/210, and the player continues to hit left until the jackpot is won.

If a jackpot is won based on the special 1 reservation in a normal state, the special pattern A is decided with a probability of 50%, and the special patterns B and C are decided with a probability of 25%. When the special symbol A is determined, as shown in FIG. 87(b), a big win game consisting of four round games is executed. However, when the special symbol A is determined, since the big winning opening 126 is opened only for 0.1 second in the fourth round game, the number of prize balls that the player can actually obtain is three times. It will be a round game. Hereinafter, the big win game in which the special symbol A is determined and executed is called a 4R normal big win game.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole 126, 15 prize balls are paid out for one game ball entering. Since the prescribed number in one round game is 10, when the prescribed number of game balls enter the big winning opening 126, 150 prize balls are paid out in one round game. In the 4R normal big role game, 450 prize balls can be acquired in three round games.

Also, in the 4R normal big win game, the game ball does not enter the probability variable region 140a. Therefore, the game state after the end of the 4R normal role game becomes a low-probability time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 87(c). In the low-probability short-time state, the real variation target is special 2 variation, so the player performs so-called right-handed hitting and shoots the game ball toward the second game area 116b. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the special symbol A is determined, and the low-probability time-saving state is set, the special 2 time-saving number of times is set to 100 times.

In the low-probability time-saving state, when a jackpot is not won within the special 2 time-saving number of times, so-called time-saving omission occurs, and the game state shifts to a normal state. In this case, the player hits to the left again and aims to win a jackpot by special 1 variation.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when a jackpot is won based on special 1 reservation and special symbols B and C are determined, as shown in FIG. A big role game is executed. Hereinafter, the big win game in which the special symbols B and C are determined and executed is called a 4R probability variable big win game. In the 4R probability variable big role game, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 1st to 4th round games. Therefore, in the 4R probability variable big role game, 600 prize balls can be acquired in four round games.

Also, in the 4R probability variable big role game, if the game is played appropriately, the game ball enters the probability variable region 140a in the specific round game. Therefore, the game state after the end of the 4R probability variable big role game becomes a probability variable state as shown in FIG. 87(e). In the probability variable state, since the actual variation target is special 2 variation, the player hits to the right and shoots the game ball toward the second game area 116b. In addition, when the special symbols B and C are determined and set to the variable probability state, both the high probability number and the special 2 o'clock short number are set to 150 times.

In the variable probability state, when the jackpot is not won within the range of the number of times of the special 2 time saving, it becomes a so-called time saving omission, and the game state shifts to the normal state. In this case, the player hits to the left again and aims to win a jackpot by special 1 variation.

In addition, in the low-probability short-time state or the probability-variable state, if a jackpot is won by special 2 variation, the special pattern D is always determined as the jackpot pattern. When the special symbol D is determined, as shown in FIG. 87(f), a big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed. Hereinafter, the big win game in which the special symbol D is determined and executed is called a 10R probability variable big win game. In the 10R probability variable big role game, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 1st to 10th round games. Therefore, in the 10R probability variable big role game, 1500 prize balls can be obtained in 10 round games.

Also, in the 10R probability variable big role game, if the game is played appropriately, the game ball enters the probability variable region 140a in the specific round game. Therefore, the game state after the end of the 10R probability variable big win game becomes a specific state as shown in (h) of FIG. In the specific state, since the actual variation target is special 2 variation, the player hits to the right and shoots the game ball toward the second game area 116b.

Here, when the special symbol D is determined and set to the specific state, the high probability number of times is set to 150 times, and the special 2 hour reduction number of times is set to 2 times. As described above, the specific state is that the normal gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state, and as the termination condition of the B time-saving gaming state, the total number of special 1 fluctuations and special 2 fluctuations reaches 6 times, special 2 fluctuations It is set that the number of times reaches two times and that the variable display of normal symbols is executed once.

Since the big winning opening 126 is provided in the second game area 116b, the game ball flows down the second game area 116b even during the 10R probability variable big role game. The gate 124 is arranged on the most upstream side of the second game area 116b, and since the game ball frequently passes through the gate 124, the general pattern reservation is stored even during the 10R probability variable big role game, and the normal pattern fluctuation display is running. After the 10R probability variable big role game is finished and set to the specific state, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started first, the specific state (B time saving game state) is finished at that point, and FIG. 87 (i) As shown in , it shifts to a probability variable state. If the game is appropriately played, it shifts from the specific state to the probability variation state during the first special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation big role game.

As described above, the variation time of the first special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation big role game is 10 seconds. After the 10R probability variable big role game ends, during 10 seconds until the end of the first special 2 fluctuation, when the normal drawing lottery is executed and the winning is won, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), A non-electrical bonus period is granted. In other words, the non-electrical bonus period is provided based on the execution of the general pattern lottery during the first special 2 variation after the end of the 10R probability variable big role game. This non-electrical bonus period is an execution period of one auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is opened 10 times.

When a normal drawing lottery is executed in a specific state and a win is won, an auxiliary game is executed. The auxiliary game executed by winning the normal drawing lottery in the specific state is composed of 10 sets of open games. In one set of open games, the normal electric winning opening 123 is kept closed for 5.0 seconds after being opened for 0.16 seconds. Therefore, one set of open games takes about 5.16 seconds, and an auxiliary game consisting of 10 sets of open games takes 51.6 seconds or more. Also, when the auxiliary game is executed, the opening time is set to 2.0 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.5 seconds, so the total time required for the auxiliary game is 54.1 seconds. Therefore, after the big role game, the fluctuation time of the second special 2 fluctuation (70 seconds or 10 minutes) is longer than the time from the opening start to the end of the normal electric winning opening 123 and the time of the entire auxiliary game. be.

If the player is hitting right, game balls are shot to the second game area 116b at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Almost all of the game balls shot toward the second game area 116b fall onto the movable piece 123b. As described above, the game ball falling on the movable piece 123b rolls on the movable piece 123b for about 1 to 3 seconds. Therefore, if the game balls are dropped onto the movable piece 123b at intervals of 0.6 seconds, when the normal electric prize winning opening 123 is opened for 0.16 seconds, 1 to 2 game balls are surely dropped into the normal electric The ball enters the winning hole 123 .

All the game balls entered into the normal electric winning hole 123 enter the upper second starting hole 122.例文帳に追加When the game ball enters the upper second start port 122, the special 2 reservation is acquired, and the game ball that enters the second start port 122 is placed on the back side of the game board 108 to drop the game ball. In the process of falling down the path 144, the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the second non-electrical winning device 129 are changed to the open state.

The normal electric prize winning opening 123 is kept closed for 5.0 seconds after being opened for 0.16 seconds. Therefore, if the player continues hitting to the right during this period, the game ball that has fallen onto the movable piece 123b in the closed state flows further downward. The movable piece 127b of the first non-electrical winning device 127 and the movable piece 129b of the second non-electrical winning device 129 are positioned on the rolling path of the game ball flowing downward from the movable piece 123b. Then, when the movable pieces 127b and 129b are in the open state, almost all of the game balls that flow downward from the movable piece 123b enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a. (See FIG. 72).

As already explained, the first non-electrical winning device 127 is closed when two game balls enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a, and the second non-electrical winning device 129 opens two game balls. When the ball enters the second non-electrical winning hole 129a, it is closed.

That is, in one set of open games, a total of four game balls enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a by entering the game ball into the normal electric winning opening 123. A ball becomes possible. In the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a, for example, 14 game balls are paid out as prize balls for one game ball entering. In this case, the player can win 56 prize balls in one set of open games. Since 10 sets of open games are performed in the auxiliary game, the player can obtain an additional 560 prize balls in the non-electrical bonus period immediately after the 10R probability variable big role game.

The number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a is not particularly limited, and may be ten, for example. In this case, the player can acquire 400 game balls during the non-electric bonus period. However, as in the embodiment, if the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a is set to 14 or more, 10R probability variable big role game In addition, 2000 or more game balls can be acquired, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

As described above, the non-electrical bonus period takes 50 seconds or more, but after the 10R probability variable big role game is finished, it is set to the special fluctuation period. By providing a special fluctuation period, after the end of the 10R certain variable big role game, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation will be 10 seconds if it is lost, and the fluctuation time of the second special 2 fluctuation will be 70 seconds or 10 minutes. Therefore, after the end of the 10R probability variable big role game, if the results of the big role lottery based on the first and second special 2 reservations are both lost, the non-electric bonus period is guaranteed during the second special 2 fluctuation to end.

Then, if the results of the big role lottery based on the first and second special 2 reservations are both lost, from the third special 2 variation, the game will start in the same way as the definite variable state shown in (e) of FIG. proceed. Further, if a big win is won by the big win lottery based on the first or second special 2 reservation after the 10R probability variable big role game is finished, the 10R probability variable big role game is executed again. Details will be described later, but after the end of the 10R high probability variable big role game, if a big hit is won by the big lottery lottery based on the first special 2 reservation, the second 10R high probability variable big role game and the non-electric bonus period overlap. . In other words, even in this case, the player can obtain prize balls during the second 10R probability variable big role game during the non-electric bonus period. In addition, the non-electrical bonus period is provided even after the second 10R probability variable big role game ends.

FIG. 88 is a timing chart of the 10R probability variable big role game and the non-electrical bonus period according to the embodiment. It should be noted that the timing chart shown in FIG. 88 shows the case where the first special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation big role game is a loss. When the 10R probability variable big role game is executed, as shown in (a) of FIG. 88, an opening period (shown as "OP" in the figure) is set, and then the big winning opening 126 is opened during the round game. . Then, when the tenth round game (shown as "final R" in the figure) is completed, an ending period (shown as "ED" in the figure) is set.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), during the 10R probability variable big role game, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, and after the end of the ending period, the first special 2 variation is 10 seconds. After a fixed time (0.5 seconds), the second Special 2 variation is performed. In addition, FIG. 88 shows a case where the number of special 1 reservations at the start of the second special 2 fluctuation is less than 2 and the fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation is 70 seconds.

Further, as shown in (e) of FIG. 88, the game state is set to the B time-saving game state at the end of the ending period. Then, during the first special 2 fluctuation, during the B time-saving game state, as shown in (c) of FIG. The game state shifts to a non-time-saving game state. This variable display of normal symbols is performed for 1 second, and when winning symbols are displayed, 10 sets of opening games consisting of opening and closing the normal electric winning opening 123 are repeated as shown in FIG. 88(d). During each open game, the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a are opened based on the entry of the game ball into the normal electric winning opening 123, and two game balls are released. The entry of the ball closes the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a.

Here, the gaming machine 100 outputs an external signal to a hall computer provided in the gaming arcade. In the game hall, an external display device is installed for each game machine 100, and based on the external signal output from the game machine 100, the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, whether the jackpot is in progress, and whether the game is in progress. Whether or not is displayed on the external display device. The external signal includes a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot is in progress. This jackpot signal is usually output during a big win game.

Also, although not shown, in the gaming machine 100, a prize ball signal is output as an external signal each time ten game balls are paid out as prize balls. In the external display device, for example, by counting the number of times the prize ball signal is output while the jackpot signal is output, the total number of prize balls paid out during one big win game is notified.

Here, the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment provides a non-electrical bonus period immediately after the 10R probability variable big role game ends. As described above, the player can win, for example, 1500 prize balls in the 10R variable big role game, and 560 prize balls in the non-electric bonus period. If the 10R variable big role game and the non-electric bonus period are regarded as one big hit, originally only 1500 game balls can be obtained in one big role game, but 2000 or more game balls, which is more than that, can be obtained. You can let us know if you got it.

In this case, for example, the output condition of the jackpot signal is set in advance as follows. That is, during the big role game (from the start of the opening to the end of the ending), during the specific state (B time reduction game state), from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display in the specific state (B time reduction game state), the normal electric winning opening 123 A period until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after closing is set as an output condition of the jackpot signal. This predetermined time includes the time until a total of four game balls enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a in the tenth set of open games, and is included in one big win. set for Therefore, the predetermined time is preferably set to the time required for a total of four game balls to enter the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a. For example, when game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, it takes at least 0.6 seconds×4=2.4 seconds to shoot four game balls, so 2.4 A time of seconds or longer is preferable. When the output condition of the jackpot signal is set in this manner, the jackpot signal is output as shown in FIG. 88(h). In this case, the jackpot signal is output from the start of the 10R probability variable big win game to the end of the non-electric bonus period.

Also, for example, the non-electric bonus can be made to look like a jackpot different from the big win game. For example, during the big role game (from the start of the opening to the end of the ending), and from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol in the specific state (B time saving game state), after the normal electric winning opening 123 is closed, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds ) is set as an output condition for the jackpot signal. That is, unlike the example shown in FIG. 88(h), during the specific state (during B time-saving game state) is not set as the output condition of the jackpot signal.

When the output condition of the jackpot signal is set in this manner, the jackpot signal is output as in the modification shown in FIG. 88(i). In this case, the output of the jackpot signal is interrupted during the 10R probability variable big role game and during the non-electrical bonus period. Therefore, the external display device counts that the jackpot signal is output twice, and the number of jackpot wins is counted more than the example shown in FIG. 88(h).

Processing in the main control board 300 for realizing the above-described game characteristics will be described below. Here, among the processing of the main control board 300, the processing different from the simultaneous rotation reference example will be described. Therefore, among the processes described in the simultaneous rotation reference example, processes that are not described below are similarly executed in the embodiment.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89, in the timer interrupt process according to the embodiment, a payout control management process S800 is executed instead of the payout control management process S400-25 of the simultaneous turning reference example. This payout control management process S800 will be described later.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart illustrating switch management processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The switch management process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the switch management process according to the simultaneous turning reference example. The switch management process according to the embodiment is the same as the switch management process according to the simultaneous turning reference example in the processes from S500-1 to S540, but differs in the processes after S500-13. Therefore, the processing after S500-13 will be described here.

(S500-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the probability variable region detection switch ON is detected, that is, whether a game ball enters the probability variable region 140a and a detection signal is input from the probability variable region detection switch 140s. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to detect the probability variable region detection switch ON, the process proceeds to step S550, and when it is determined that it is not time to detect the probability variable region detection switch ON, the switch management processing ends.

(Step S550)
The main CPU 300a executes probability variable area passage processing for determining whether or not the game ball has properly entered the probability variable area 140a.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart for explaining the variable probability area passing process (step S550) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S550-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not a probability variable area effective period flag indicating a period during which entry of a game ball into the probability variable area 140a is considered valid is turned on. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the probability variable area effective period flag is turned on at the start of the fourth round game, and turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the end of the fourth round game. . If it is determined that the probability variable region effective period flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S550-3, and if it is determined that the probability variable area effective period flag is not turned on, the process is shifted to step S550-5.

(Step S550-3)
The main CPU 300a turns on the probability variable region passage flag and ends the probability variable region passage processing.

(Step S550-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error process and terminates the variable probability area passing process.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol variation number determination process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the special symbol variation number determination process according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the currently set game state and determines whether the normal game state is the time-saving game state. As a result, when it is determined that the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step S612-5, and when it is determined that it is not the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step S612-21.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the second special symbol display 162 starts to display the symbols in a variable manner. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to start the variable display of the symbols on the second special symbol display device 162, the process is shifted to step S612-7, and when the variable display of the symbols on the second special symbol display device 162 starts. If it is determined that it is not, the process moves to step S612-13.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the special 2 hour reduction counter that counts the number of special 2 hour reduction times.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the special 2-hour short cut counter updated in step S612-7 is 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process moves to step S612-11, and if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process moves to step S612-13.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a resets (to 0) a total time-saving counter that counts the total number of time-savings.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the total time-saving counter that counts the total number of time-savings.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the total time saving multiple cutting counter updated in step S612-13 is 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process moves to step S612-17, and if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process moves to step S612-21.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets to 0) the special 2 hour reduction counter.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a turns on a zero flag that indicates that the counter value of the special 2 time reduction counter or the total time reduction counter has been changed from 1 to 0.

(Step S612-21)
The main CPU 300a selects and sets a corresponding variation pattern random number determination table based on the current game state, pending type, determined special symbol type, pending number, etc., and executes a variation pattern random number determination table selection process.

(Step S612-23)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table set in step S612-21 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9 or step S610-55. do.

(Step S612-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-23 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart for explaining the number cutting management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The number cutting management process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the number cutting management process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the zero flag is on. As a result, when it is determined that the zero flag is on, the process proceeds to step S613-3, and when it is determined that the zero flag is not on, the number cutting management process ends.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal game state to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, although detailed description is omitted here, as a time saving state flag indicating the normal game state, flags for non time saving game state, A time saving game state, and B time saving game state are provided. During the game, one of the time saving state flags is turned on, but here, the main CPU 300a turns off the flag for the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state, and turns on the non-time saving game state flag. do.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a turns off the zero flag and terminates the number cutting management process.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process (step S630) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the special symbol stop symbol display process according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the special symbol associated with the pending type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. . As a result, when it is determined that the stop display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S630-5, and when it is determined that the stop display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-23 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is moved to step S630-37, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S630. -7 is processed.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big role lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined to be a loss, the process moves to step S630-29, and if it is determined to be not a loss, the process moves to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not there is a special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S631, and if it is determined that there is no special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes symbol forced stop processing.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to the initial state.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the determined special symbol type.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for setting the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory. Specifically, referring to the data set in the above step S630-15, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation counter. . It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big winning game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter, the current The number of round games is managed. Here, along with the start of the big winning game, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big win game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H".

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal plate 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. By this process, a big hit signal is output with the start of the big win game (opening).

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state confirmation designation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing object identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, when it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the special symbol stop design display processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing is moved to step S630-39. .

(Step S630-39)
Main CPU 300a adds 01H to the process target identification value, and shifts the process to step S630-3.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening end wait process (S670) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The wait process for ending the big winning opening according to the embodiment is executed instead of the waiting process for ending the big winning opening according to the above-described simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the game state, the number of high-accuracy games, and the number of time-saving games set in the preliminary area (preliminary counter) in step S610-29 or step S610-75.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the probability variable area passing flag.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a special game state based on the variable probability area passage flag loaded in step S670-5. Here, if the probability variable region passing flag is an ON flag, it is set to a high probability gaming state, and if the probability variable region passing flag is an OFF flag, it is set to a low probability gaming state.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S670-7 whether the high probability game state has been set. As a result, when it is determined that the high probability game state has been set, the process proceeds to step S670-11, and when it is determined that the high probability game state has not been set, the process proceeds to step S670-13.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the high-accuracy number-of-times counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal game state based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the total time-saving cut-off counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the special 2 time-saving multi-cut counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the B time-saving game state is set in step S670-13. As a result, when it is determined that the B time saving game state is set, the process is moved to step S670-21, and when it is determined that the B time saving game state is not set, the process is moved to step S670-23.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal figure time reduction counter. In addition, the normal pattern time reduction counter counts the number of times of normal pattern fluctuation display until the B time reduction game state is terminated. Here, "1" is set to the normal figure time reduction counter.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a executes a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping output of the jackpot signal. Thereby, when the B time-saving game state is not set after the big win game, the output of the big win signal is stopped at the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state to be set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-27)
The main CPU 300a sets a frequency command corresponding to the high accuracy frequency and the time saving frequency in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, when special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is stored, the variable display of the symbols is resumed.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart for explaining the normal symbol variation waiting process (S710) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol variation waiting process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the normal symbol variation waiting process according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal pattern reserved ball number counter is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol variation waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the general pattern reservation (hitting decision random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the general pattern reservation storage area to the storage unit with a lower ordinal number. Specifically, the general map hold stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and transfers the normal pattern suspension stored in the 1st storage unit to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this normal design storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal design reservation ball number counter is decremented by "1", and a normal design reservation reduction designation command is transmitted to indicate that the normal design reservation has subtracted "1". set in the buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects a winning determination random number determination table corresponding to the current game state, performs a general pattern lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. The normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and when winning, the normal symbol display 168 is lit, and when losing, the normal symbol display 168 is extinguished. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is finally lit. is determined, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current game state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S710-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display device 168 in order to start variable display of normal symbols. When the normal symbol display symbol counter is set to, for example, "0" as the counter value, the normal symbol display 168 is controlled to light up, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal symbol is displayed. device 168 is controlled to turn off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of variable display of normal symbols.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sends a normal symbol designation command to the transmission buffer based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S710-7, that is, the symbol type (hit symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol win determination process. set to

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal pattern time reduction counter is 0. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is 0, the normal symbol variation waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S710-23.

(Step S710-23)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the normal figure time reduction counter.

(Step S710-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the standard time reduction counter updated in step S710-23 is 0. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S710-27, and when it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the normal symbol variation waiting process is terminated.

(Step S710-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal game state to a non-time-saving game state. Here, the flag for the B time-saving game state is turned off, and the flag for the non-time-saving game state is turned on.

(Step S710-29)
The main CPU 300a turns on the signal-off standby flag.

(Step S710-31)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and terminates the normal symbol variation waiting process.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing (S741) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching frequency (the number of opening/closing times of the movable piece 123b of the normal electric prize winning opening 123 during one opening/closing control). determine whether As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741-3. Move.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching counter, the solenoid control data (energization control data or energization control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c. stop control data), and timer data that is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or the energization stop time (normal closing valid time = pause time) of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c.

(Step S741-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S741-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c, or the normal electric role for stopping the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c. Executes an object solenoid energization control process. By executing this normal electric accessory solenoid energization control process, in steps S400-23 and S400-25, the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c is controlled to start or stop energization.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. It should be noted that the timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the normal electric winning opening 123 .

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c has been performed in step S741-5. As a result, when it is determined that the power supply is started, the process moves to step S741-11, and when it is determined that the power supply is not started, the process moves to step S741-15.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory open/close switching frequency counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S741-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal electric opening specification command indicating the start of opening of the normal electric prize winning opening 123 in the transmission buffer, and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process.

(Step S741-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c is in a de-energization state, that is, whether or not control processing for stopping the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 123c has been performed in step S741-5. As a result, when it is determined that the power supply is stopped, the process proceeds to step S741-17, and when it is determined that the power supply is not stopped, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process ends.

(Step S741-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal electric closing designation command indicating the end of opening of the normal electric prize winning opening 123 in the transmission buffer, and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait processing (S770) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the normal electric accessary product winning opening end wait process according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the signal-off standby flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the signal OFF standby flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S770-5, and if it is determined that the signal OFF standby flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S770-9. Move.

(Step S770-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds in the signal off timer. Note that the timer value of this signal-off timer is subtracted in the timer updating process of S400-15. When the timer value is decremented from 1 to 0, the jackpot signal is turned off in the external information management process of S400-27. Thereby, when the winning pattern is determined by the normal drawing lottery executed in the B time saving game state, and the auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning prize opening 123 is opened is executed, the opening of the normal electric winning prize opening 123 for the 10th time is completed. After 5 seconds have elapsed, the jackpot signal is turned off.

(Step S770-7)
The main CPU 300a turns off the signal-off standby flag.

(Step S770-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H", and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when normal pattern suspension is stored, the variable display of normal patterns is resumed.

FIG. 99 is a flow chart explaining the payout control management process (S800) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S800-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not a payout completion command indicating completion of payout has been received from the payout control board 310 . In addition, the payout completion command is configured to be able to identify the number of game balls that have been paid out. If it is determined that the payout completion command has been received, the process proceeds to step S800-3, and if it is determined that the payout completion command has not been received, the payout control management process is terminated.

(Step S800-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the payout counter. The payout counter counts 10 game balls, and the counter value is updated from 0 to 9. When the counter value is 9, it is updated from 9 to 0. Here, the counter value is updated by the number of game balls indicated by the received payout completion command.

(Step S800-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the payout counter has been updated from 9 to 0 in step S800-3. As a result, when it is determined that the number has been updated from 9 to 0, the process proceeds to step S800-7, and when it is determined that the number has not been updated from 9 to 0, the payout control management process is terminated.

(Step S800-7)
The main CPU 300a outputs a winning signal, which is an external signal, and terminates the payout control management process. It should be noted that, for example, when the payout counter is in a state of 9 and a payout completion command indicating completion of payout of 15 pieces is received, the counter value of the payout counter is updated from 9 to 0 twice in one process. . Thus, when the counter value is updated from 9 to 0 twice, the winning signal is output twice. As a result, every time 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls, a winning signal is output.

Next, the 10R probability variable big role game and the production related to the non-electrical bonus period will be described. In the embodiment, an effect is executed so as to make the 10R probability variable big win game and the non-electrical bonus period look like one big win. However, the non-electrical bonus period is not granted unless the variable display of normal symbols is executed during the first special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation big role game. That is, after the 10R probability variable big role game, before the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, if the second special 2 fluctuation is started, at the start of the second special 2 fluctuation, the normal game state is a non-time saving game state is set.

Therefore, even if the variation display of the normal symbol is started after the start of the second special 2 variation, the normal symbol lottery will be executed in the non-time-saving game state. In this case, even if a winning symbol is won in the general pattern lottery, the normal electric prize winning opening 123 is opened only once for 0.1 seconds, and the player cannot obtain the non-electrical bonus. As described above, after the 10R probability variable big role game, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation is determined to be 10 seconds regardless of whether or not the non-electric bonus period is set, and the fluctuation time of the second special 2 fluctuation is It is determined to be 70 seconds or 10 minutes regardless of whether the electric bonus period is set or not. Even if the non-electrical bonus period is not set, if the same effect as when the non-electrical bonus period is set is executed, the player will feel uncomfortable for a long time. There is a risk.

Further, as described above, after the 10R probability variable big role game, when the jackpot is won in the first special 2 variation, the second 10R probability variable big role game and the non-electric bonus period overlap. In this case, it is desirable to execute an effect that enhances satisfaction. In the embodiment, the amusement of the game is improved by changing the effect according to the result of special 2 variation after the 10R probability variable big role game and whether or not the non-electrical bonus period is set.

Here, a plurality of effect systems are provided which are selectively executed according to the result of the special 2 variation after the 10R probability variable big role game and whether or not the non-electric bonus period is set. Six patterns of effect systems from the first effect system to the sixth effect system will be described below. Further, each effect system described below is based on the premise that the game ball has entered the probability variable region 140a during the specific round game of the 10R probability variable big role game.

FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the first effect system. After the end of the 10R probability variation big role game, the first special 2 fluctuation becomes a loss, and when the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is started during this special 2 fluctuation, it spans from the first special 2 fluctuation to the second special 2 fluctuation. A non-electrical bonus period is given. After the 10R probability variable big role game, when both the first and second special 2 variations are lost and the non-electrical bonus period is provided, the performance system becomes the first performance system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(a), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variable big role game, and after the ending period elapses, the special 2 variation is executed twice. In both special 2 fluctuations, finally, the missing symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162. - 特許庁Also, during the first special 2 variation, the variation display of the normal symbols is started, and after the winning symbols are displayed, the auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of open games are executed through the opening period. This auxiliary game ends during special 2 fluctuation regardless of the start timing of the fluctuation display of normal symbols. In FIG. 100, cross hatching indicates that the normal electric prize winning opening 123 is open, and "Int." in the figure indicates the interval during which the normal electric winning opening 123 is maintained in the closed state.

In the first production system, a round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R probability variable big role game. Then, along with the start of the tenth round game, a direction instruction effect is executed to prompt a shooting operation for causing the game ball to flow down to the second game area 116b. Then, along with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, an occurrence effect for notifying the occurrence of the non-electrical bonus is executed.

After that, from the start of the 1st set of open game to the end of the 10th set of open game, the winning effect is executed, and from the end of the 10th set of open game to the end of the second special 2 variation, the ending An effect (shown as "ED effect" in the figure) is executed. In addition, from the start of the first round game in the 10R probability variable big role game to the end of the 10th set of open games, in parallel with the above effects, the round number display effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are displayed. executed.

FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining an example of the content of the effects of the first effect system. During the 10R probability variable big role game, an episode effect is executed. The episode effect is a effect in which a predetermined animation image is displayed for each round game. Here, as episode effects, a total of six execution patterns are provided from chapters 1 to 6, and animation images displayed during each round game are different for each execution pattern.

Incidentally, the method of determining the execution pattern of the episode effect executed during the 10R probability variable big role game is not particularly limited. For example, in one consecutive state, Chapter 1 is selected when the 10R probability variable big role game is first executed, and thereafter, every time the 10R probability variable big role game is executed, Chapter 2, Chapter 3, etc. For example, select up to Chapter 6 in order. Then, when the episode effect of Chapter 6 is executed, the episode effect of Chapter 1 may be executed in the next 10R probability variable big role game.

Also, for example, Chapter 6 is positioned as a premium effect, and Chapters 1 to 5 are repeatedly executed in the same manner as described above. Then, in the state where the episode effect of Chapter 5 is executed, when the next big win is won and the 10R probability variable big role game is executed, on the condition that the predetermined variation information is determined, Chapter 6 Episodic production may be performed. At this time, during the variable performance of the big win, the premium variable performance leading to the episode performance of Chapter 6 is executed, and following the premium variable performance, the episode performance of Chapter 6 is preferably executed.

Alternatively, the execution pattern of the episode effect may be determined by lottery for each 10R probability variable big role game. Further, an effect different from the episode effect may be provided as the effect executed during the 10R probability variable big role game, and the episode effect may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), the episode production is started with the start of the first round game, and during the 1st to 9th round games, the main production display unit 200a displays each episode production as the round production. A predetermined image (not shown) provided in is displayed. In addition, during this time, a round number display effect is executed to display the current number of round games played in the lower left part of the main effect display section 200a, and a total winning number notification effect is executed to display the total number of game balls acquired by the player. be.

Then, when the tenth round game is started, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the main effect display section 200a displays a message "Aim for the right gate" and an arrow pointing to the right. A direction indication effect is started. This direction indication effect is executed over the first special 2 variation from the start of the tenth round game. It should be noted that when the special 2 variation is started during the direction indication effect, as shown in FIG. 101(c), the variable display of the mini symbols is started in the upper right portion of the main effect display section 200a. Here, 9 types of mini-symbols marked with any number from 1 to 9 are scroll-displayed. In each figure below, the scrolling display of mini symbols is indicated by white arrows.

When the variable display of normal symbols is started during the direction indication effect, as shown in FIG. 101(d), the main effect display section 200a executes the generation effect of displaying "non-electric BONUS GET". During this generation performance, when the first special 2 variation is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 101(e). . Here, when the result of the big win lottery is a big win, the mini symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and when the result of the big win lottery is a loss, the mini-symbols other than "7" are stop-displayed. Here, since the first special 2 variation is a loss, the mini symbol "2" is stopped and displayed.

Further, here, even during the generation effect, the round number display effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are continuously executed. However, during the generation effect, the round number display effect and the total acquisition number notification effect may be interrupted.

Then, when the first set of open games is started after the winning symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display 168, the winning effect is started. In this winning effect, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display portion 200a, and a predetermined number of Sound is output. Furthermore, even during this prize-winning effect, the round number display effect and the total winning number notification effect are continuously executed.

However, the round number display effect and the total winning number notification effect change during the 10R probability variable big role game and during the non-electrical bonus period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(f), "EXTRA" is displayed above the number indicating the number of rounds played in the round number display effect during the non-electrical bonus period. In addition, in the round number display effect during the non-electric bonus period, the number of open games in the auxiliary game is added to the round game number of the 10R probability variable big role game. Therefore, during the open game of the first set, as shown in FIG. 101(f), the number of round games is displayed as "11R", and during the open game of the tenth set, as shown in FIG. 101(g) , the number of round games is displayed as "20R".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the display of the number of rounds played in the number-of-rounds display effect is updated based on the entry of the game ball into the normal electric winning opening 123 and the upper second starting opening 122. . Therefore, in one set of open games, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 and the upper second starting opening 122, the number of round games is not updated.

In addition, in the total winning number notification effect during the non-electrical bonus period, the total winning number is displayed in the center of the main effect display section 200a so as to be more conspicuous than during the 10R probability variable big role game. Then, in the total winning number notification performance during the non-electrical bonus period, the number of game balls acquired during the non-electrical bonus period is added to the total number of winnings acquired in the 10R certain variable big role game. That is, the total winning number notification effect during the non-electrical bonus period is started in a state in which the total winning number acquired during the 10R probability variable role game is displayed. Here, during the non-electrical bonus period, the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electrical winning prize port 127a and the second non-electrical winning prize port 129a is large during the 10R probability variable big win game. It is added to the number of game balls put out based on the entry of game balls into the prize winning opening 126 .

As shown in FIGS. 101(f) and 101(g), during the second special 2 variation, similar to the first special 2 variation, the mini symbols are changed in the upper right part of the main effect display section 200a. display is running. Then, when the 10th set of the open game ends, the ending effect is executed. In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 101(h), the number of round games counted over the non-electrical bonus period from the 10R probability variable big role game and the total number of wins are notified. This ending effect continues until the second special 2 variation is completed, and when the second special 2 variation is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, FIG. 101(i). , the mini-symbols are stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(j), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed with the start of the third special 2 variation. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, during the special 2 fluctuation after the third time, the fluctuation production of the no-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern is executed as in the above-mentioned production reference example.

Here, as described above, in the embodiment, the player can acquire 2000 or more game balls by combining the 10R probability variable big role game and the non-electric bonus period. However, during the non-electrical bonus period, if a game ball does not enter the normal electric winning prize opening 123, the first non-electrical winning prize opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning prize opening 129a are not opened. Not all can be acquired by the player.

Although the player expects to acquire 2000 or more game balls, as shown in FIG. 101, if the acquisition of less than 2000 game balls is notified, the player feels a sense of loss. There is a risk that the desire to play will decrease. Therefore, in the embodiment, the number of winning balls is counted and reported as follows during the 10R variable bonus game and during the non-electric bonus period.

FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a counter updating method. The sub-RAM 330c is provided with two types of counters, a first counter and a second counter, as counters for notifying the total number of winnings in the number-of-winnings reporting effect. Below, the counter value of the first counter is indicated as C1, and the counter value of the second counter is indicated as C2.

In the total acquisition number reporting effect, the total acquisition number is reported based on the counter value C2 of the second counter. That is, the counter value C2 of the second counter is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. On the other hand, the first counter is provided for executing internal processing, and the counter value C1 cannot be confirmed from the outside.

The first counter and the second counter are updated during the 10R probability variable role game and during the non-electric bonus period. A period in which the first counter or the second counter is updated is hereinafter referred to as a counter update period.

As described above, after the end of the 10R probability variable big role game, there is a period during which the special symbols are variably displayed in the specific state before the non-electrical bonus period is started. Here, it is assumed that neither the first counter nor the second counter is updated during the period between the 10R probability variable big role game and the non-electrical bonus period. However, the first counter and the second counter may be updated during the period between the 10R probability variable big win game and the non-electrical bonus period. In this case, the period from the start of the 10R probability variable big role game to the end of the non-electrical bonus period is the counter update period. Also, as described above, the non-electrical bonus period may not be set after the 10R probability variable big role game. In this case, the counter update period ends with the end of the 10R probability variable big role game.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole 126, the main control board 300 transmits to the sub control board 330 a big winning hole entering ball specifying command indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 126. - 特許庁In the sub-control board 330, when receiving the big winning hole entry designation command during the counter update period, as shown in FIG. 102(a), the counter value C2 of the second counter is incremented by "15". Here, it is assumed that the second counter is updated based on the reception of the special winning hole entering ball designation command. When the ball is paid out, the main control board 300 may transmit a payout completion command capable of identifying the number of prize balls to the sub control board 330, and the second counter may be updated upon receipt of the payout completion command. .

During the counter update period, the big winning opening 126 is opened only during the 10R probability variable big role game. Therefore, the counter value C2 of the second counter is incremented by "15" based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 126 only during the 10R probability variable big winning game.

In addition, the first non-electrical winning opening 127a or the second non-electrical winning opening 129a (hereinafter, the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a may be collectively referred to simply as the non-electrical winning opening. ), the main control board 300 transmits to the sub-control board 330 a non-electrical winnings entry ball designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the non-electrical winnings opening. In the sub-control board 330, when receiving the non-electrical prize winning ball designation command during the counter update period, the counter value C2 of the second counter is updated.

Further, even when game balls enter a winning opening other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electric winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Specifically, in the embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and the game ball enters the general winning hole 118. When the ball is thrown, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters these winning holes, the main control board 300 transmits to the sub control board 330 a ball entry designation command indicating that a game ball has entered each winning hole. In the sub-control board 330, when each incoming ball designation command is received during the counter update period, the counter value C1 of the first counter is updated by the number of winning balls set for each winning hole.

In addition, even when the game ball enters the non-electrical winning opening and other winning openings, a payout completion command capable of identifying the number of paid out prize balls is transmitted to the sub control board 330, and the payout completion command is sent to the sub control board 330. Upon receipt, the first counter or the second counter may be updated. In any case, during the counter update period, the counter value C1 of the first counter or the counter value C2 of the second counter, based on the entry of game balls into each winning hole, is the number of prize balls to be paid out, or It suffices to update (add) the number of prize balls that have been paid out.

Here, during the counter update period, the non-electrical winning opening is opened only during the non-electrical bonus period. Therefore, the counter value C2 of the second counter is added only during the non-electrical bonus period based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electrical winning hole. During the non-electrical bonus period, the value added to the counter value C2 based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electrical winning opening, that is, the added value differs depending on the counter value C1 of the first counter at that time. .

Specifically, when a game ball enters a non-electrical winning opening, if the counter value C1 of the first counter is less than "5", the number of winning balls set in the non-electrical winning opening is "14" is added to the counter value C2 of the second counter.

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the non-electrical winning opening, if the counter value C1 of the first counter is "5" or more, the number of winning balls set in the non-electrical winning opening is "19" obtained by adding "5" as a predetermined number to "14" is added to the counter value C2 of the second counter. That is, in this case, the counter value C2 is updated by 5 more than the actual number of prize balls paid out due to the game balls entering the non-electrical winning hole.

On the other hand, when the counter value C2 is updated more than the number of prize balls actually paid out based on the entry of game balls into the non-electrical prize winning opening, this extra updated amount is the first It is subtracted from the counter value C1 of the counter. That is, when the game ball enters the non-electrical winning hole, if the counter value C1 of the first counter is "5" or more, "19" is added to the counter value C2 of the second counter, and the first The counter value C1 of the counter is decremented by "5".

For example, as shown in FIG. 102(b), during the 10R probability variable big winning game, game balls enter the winning openings other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electric winning opening, and 25 prize balls are paid out. Suppose Also, assume that a game ball enters the big winning opening 126 and 1500 prize balls are paid out during the 10R probability variable big role game. In this case, the counter value C1 of the first counter is "25" and the counter value C2 of the second counter is "1500" at the end of the 10R probability variable big winning game.

It is assumed that the non-electrical bonus period starts in this state and the first game ball enters the non-electrical winning opening. At this time, since the counter value C1 is "5" or more, the counter value C1 of the first counter is decremented by "5" and updated to "20", and the counter value C2 of the second counter is incremented by "19". and becomes "1519". After that, when the 2nd to 5th game balls enter the non-electric winning hole, the counter value C1 is decremented by 5 and the counter value C2 is incremented by 19 in the same manner as described above. be done. Therefore, after the fifth game ball enters the non-electric winning hole, the counter value C1 is "0" and the counter value C2 is "1595".

Then, after that, it is assumed that the sixth game ball enters the non-electrical winning hole. At this time, since the counter value C1 is less than "5", the counter value C1 of the first counter is not updated, and the counter value C2 of the second counter is "1609" by adding "14". Note that the example shown in FIG. 102(b) shows a case in which no game ball has entered any winning opening other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electrical winning opening during the non-electrical bonus period. , when a game ball enters a winning opening other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electric winning opening, the counter value C1 is incremented by the number of paid out winning balls.

As described above, in the embodiment, provided in the game area 116, the first winning area (first start opening 120, second start opening 122, general winning opening 118) into which game balls can enter, and the second It has a winning area (large winning opening 126) and a third winning area (non-electric winning opening). Then, a first number (1 or 15) of game balls are put out based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning area, and a second number ( 15) game balls are paid out, and a third number (14) game balls are paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the third winning area.

The first stored value (counter value C1) is changed to the first number (1 or 15) updates the second stored value (counter value C2) by the second number (15) based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning area (large winning opening 126), and updates the third , the second stored value (counter value C2) is set to the third number (14), and the first stored value (counter value C1) is updated by the number (19) obtained by adding the specific number (5) within the range of . Then, based on the second stored value (counter value C2), the number of game balls to be paid out is notified.

In addition, when updating the second stored value (counter value C2) based on the entry of the game ball into the third winning area (non-electrical winning opening), a specific number from the first stored value (counter value C1) Subtract (5).

In addition, a predetermined game ( During the 10R probability variable big role game), the first memory value (counter value C1) and the second memory value (counter value C2) are updated, and the game ball enters at least the third winning area (non-power winning opening). The second stored value (counter value C2) is updated during the specific game (during the non-electrical bonus period) in which the ball is possible. At this time, the specific game (non-electrical bonus period) is started after the predetermined game (10R probability variable big role game).

According to the above counter updating method and the total winning number notification method, the total winning number is within the range of the number of prize balls actually paid out from the start of the 10R probability variable big role game to the end of the non-electric bonus period. A number is derived. More specifically, the number of winning balls paid out by entering the winning openings other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electric winning openings is not reported at the time when the game balls enter these winning openings. , once stocked. Then, the number of stocked prize balls is added to the number of prize balls paid out due to the entry of the game ball into the non-electrical winning prize port, based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electrical winning prize port. is released (announced) in small increments from the

As a result, although the number of prize balls paid out by entering a game ball into a non-electric prize slot is actually 14, 19 prize balls, which is five more than this, are paid out in one non-electric prize. An impression is given as if the game ball was paid out by entering the game ball into the mouth. By doing so, even if the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 126 or the non-electric winning opening is smaller than expected during the big role game or during the non-electric bonus period, other winning openings The number of prize balls paid out by entering the ball into the box is added to the total winning number, so that the player's sense of loss can be reduced.

In this case, all winning holes from which prize balls are paid out are provided as winning holes other than the big winning hole 126 and non-electrical winning holes, that is, as the winning holes to be updated for the counter value C1. However, the winning openings for which the counter value C1 is to be updated may be part of the winning openings from which prize balls are paid out. For example, only the winning openings arranged in the second game area 116b in which the big winning opening 126 and the non-electrical winning opening are provided are subject to update of the counter value C1, and the winning openings provided in the first game area 116a have the counter value C1. may be excluded from updating.

Further, here, the additional value obtained by adding "5" as a predetermined number to "14", which is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electrical winning hole, is added to the counter value C2. I decided to However, the predetermined number is not limited to "5" and may be any other value.

Further, here, when updating the counter value C2 based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electrical winning hole, a predetermined number is subtracted from the counter value C1. However, for example, a third counter may be provided and a predetermined number may be added to the counter value C3 of the third counter instead of subtracting the counter value C1. In this case, when the game ball enters the non-electric winning hole, the counter value C3 and the counter value C1 are compared, and only when the counter value C3 is a value smaller than the counter value C1 by 5 or more, the counter value "19" may be added to C2.

Here, the non-electrical bonus period is a period during which the player can win prize balls by opening the first non-electrical winning opening 127a and the second non-electrical winning opening 129a. However, in 10 sets of open games, if a game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a are not opened. Thus, in the open game of each set, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, the following effects are executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 100(b), in the open game of the first set, it is assumed that the game ball did not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 . In this case, during the interval after the normal electric prize winning opening 123 is closed, an instruction effect is executed to prompt the shooting of an appropriate game ball. This command effect is executed instead of the winning effect or together with the winning effect until the game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 .

Further, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning hole 123, the round game number is not updated in the round number display effect. Therefore, for example, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 in the first set of open games, and the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 in the second set of open games, The number of round games displayed during the second set of open games is "11".

Further, in the tenth set of open game, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning hole 123, the instruction effect is not executed, and the ending effect is executed. That is, in the tenth set of open games, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning prize opening 123, the start timing of the ending effect is higher than when the game ball enters the normal electric winning prize opening 123. get faster. The contents of the ending effect are common regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 in the tenth set of open games.

Therefore, in the tenth set of open games, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning hole 123, the time from the end of the ending effect to the end of the second special 2 variation is long. turn into. Therefore, in the embodiment, a background effect in which a predetermined background image is displayed is executed after the ending effect is completed.

FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining another example of the content of the effects of the first effect system. Here, after the 10R probability variable big role game, at the start of the second special 2 variation, the number of special 1 reservations is one or less, and the variation time is determined to be 70 seconds. For example, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 during the first set of open games, as shown in FIG. An instruction effect in which an arrow is displayed is executed. Here, although the direction instruction effect is different from the above direction instruction effect, even if the game ball does not enter the normal electric prize winning opening 123 during the open game, the direction instruction effect similar to the above is executed. may be

Then, for example, when a game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 during the second set of open games, the number of round games is displayed as "EXTRA 11R" as shown in FIG. 103(b). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 103(c), after the 9th set of open game is executed, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning hole 123 during the 10th set of open game. In this case, after closing the normal electric winning opening 123 in the tenth set of open games, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103(d). After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 103(e), a background effect in which a predetermined background image is displayed is executed. Although the background effect is executed here, a pseudo-fluctuation effect, which will be described later, may be executed instead of the background effect.

FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the second effect system. After the 10R probability variable big role game, when both the first and second special 2 variations are lost and the non-electrical bonus period is not provided, the performance system becomes the second performance system. In addition, in FIG. 104, after the 10R probability variable big role game, the special 1 pending number at the start of the second special 2 variation is 1 or less, and the variation time is determined to be 70 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 104, ten round games are executed in the 10R probability variable big role game, and two special 2 variations are executed after the ending period elapses. In both special 2 fluctuations, finally, the missing symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162. - 特許庁Further, if the variation display of normal symbols is not started during the first special 2 variation, 10 sets of open games are not executed, and the non-electrical bonus period is not provided.

Also in the second production system, a round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R variable big role game, and a direction instruction production is executed with the start of the 10th round game. be. The direction instruction performance usually ends with the start of the variable display of normal symbols, but when the variable display of normal symbols does not start, the direction instruction performance continues until the start of the second special 2 variation. executed.

Then, with the start of the second special 2 variation, the ending effect is executed. This ending effect has the same content as the first effect system described above. Then, when the ending effect is completed, the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the probability variable state is executed, and then the pseudo-variation effect is executed until the second special 2 change is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 104, since the non-electrical bonus period is not provided, the round number indication effect and the total win number notification effect end at the start of the second Special 2 variation.

FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining an example of the contents of the second effect system. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), after the 10R probability variable big role game, the direction instruction effect is executed during the first special 2 fluctuation, and the first special 2 is executed without starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. Assume that the change has ended. In this case, with the end of the special 2 variation, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper right part of the main effect display section 200a. Then, with the start of the second special 2 variation, an ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105(b). Here, since the non-electrical bonus period is not provided, the number of round games executed in the 10R probability variable big role game and the total number of wins during the 10R probability variable big role game are reported.

After the ending effect is executed over a predetermined period of time, the mode transition effect is executed. In this mode transition effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 105(c), the words "enter the variable probability mode" are displayed on the main effect display section 200a, suggesting the transition to the variable probability state. It should be noted that during the ending effect and the mode transition effect, the variable display of the mini symbols is executed, and it is notified that the special 2 variation is being performed for the second time.

Then, when the mode transition effect is executed over a predetermined period of time, the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed next. In this pseudo-fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 105(d), effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time. Here, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed so as to sway slightly. After that, as shown in FIG. 105(e), the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c and the temporary stop display shown in FIG. 105(d) are repeated.

The performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols marked with three different numbers, that is, in a losing mode. In addition, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed so as to rotate 180 degrees to the back side from the front side displayed on the main rendering display portion 200a. At this time, performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c to be temporarily stopped and displayed next are displayed on the back side. Hereinafter, the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c to the end of the temporary stop display is referred to as pseudo-variation. The time required for one pseudo-fluctuation is, for example, 1 to 2 seconds, and this pseudo-fluctuation is repeated during the pseudo-fluctuation effect.

The pseudo-variation performance is executed until the second special 2 variation is completed, and at the end of the special 2 variation, performance symbols 210a, 210b and 210c are not temporarily stopped but displayed stopped. Thus, the second special 2 variation after the 10R probability variable big role game is designed so that the variation time is determined to be 70 seconds on the premise that the performance corresponding to the non-electrical bonus period is executed. When the non-electrical bonus period is not provided, the execution timing of the ending presentation is advanced and the mode transition presentation is performed as compared with the case where the non-electrical bonus period is provided.

However, if the ending effect and the mode transition effect are executed for 70 seconds, not only will the player feel fatigued, but there is also a risk of distrust. Therefore, by executing the pseudo-variation performance as described above, it is possible to give an impression as if the special 2 variation is being executed many times, and to wipe away the feeling of fatigue and distrust.

Here, as described above, when two or more special 1 reserves are stored at the start of the second special 2 variation after the 10R probability variable big role game, the variation time is determined to be 10 minutes. Thus, by setting the variable time to a long time, all special 1 suspensions can be consumed during this time, and an irregular situation can be prevented from occurring thereafter. However, if the variable time is set to 10 minutes, after the end of the non-electrical bonus period, that is, after the end of the ending effect, the next Special 2 fluctuation of is not started.

In this case as well, if the above-described background effect or pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, not only will the player feel fatigued, but he will also feel uneasiness that a problem may occur. Therefore, in the embodiment, after the 10R probability variable big role game, at the start of the second special 2 variation, two or more special 1 suspensions are stored, and when the variation time is determined to be 10 minutes, special variation production is executed.

It should be noted that this special variation production, after the 10R probability variation big role game, the first and second special 2 variation is a loss, and when the variation time of the second special 2 variation is determined to be 10 minutes, 2 Executed during the second special change. The special variation effect can be executed when the effect system is the first effect system or when it is the second effect system. The case where the effect system is the first effect system means the case where the non-electrical bonus period is set. In this case, until the non-electrical bonus period ends, the same effect as described above is executed, and after the non-electrical bonus period ends, the special variation effect is executed.

Further, the case where the effect system is the second effect system is the case where the non-electrical bonus period is not set. Therefore, in this case, after the end of the mode transition effect, the special change effect is executed instead of the pseudo change effect.

FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of the special variation effect. For example, in the first effect system, if the ending effect ends during the second special 2 change, or in the second effect system, if the mode transition effect ends during the second special 2 change, FIG. As shown in a), the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the episode effect executed during the round game of the 10R probability variable big role game is started.

Here, first, the episode effect of Chapter 1 is executed, and the image for the episode effect of Chapter 1 is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the BGM dedicated to the episode effect of Chapter 1 is output. . The BGM output at this time is the BGM output during the 10R probability variable big role game. Each episode effect is composed of, for example, about one minute, and the episode effect executed in the special variable effect is the same as the episode effect executed during the 10R probability variable big role game. That is, in the special variable effect, the effect image common to the episode effect executed during the 10R probability variable big role game is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Although illustration is omitted, the mini symbols are variably displayed during the episode production.

Then, when the episode effect of Chapter 1 ends, effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as shown in FIG. 106(c). Here, similar to the above-described pseudo-fluctuation effect, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are not completely stopped, but are temporarily stopped and displayed in a slightly swaying state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(d), when the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c start the re-varying display, next, as shown in FIG. 106(e), episode production of Chapter 2 is executed. . Here, an image for the episode effect of Chapter 2 is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and BGM dedicated to the episode effect of Chapter 2 is output. Also, when the episode effect of the second chapter is finished, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(g), when the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c start to change display again, next, as shown in FIG. 106(h), episode production of Chapter 3 is executed. . When the episode effect of Chapter 3 is finished, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the episode effects of Chapters 4 and 5 are successively executed with a pseudo-fluctuation in between.

It should be noted that in the special variation effect, after the episode effect of Chapter 5 ends, the pseudo-variation is repeatedly executed as in the second effect system, and finally, as shown in FIGS. 106(i) and (j) , production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination pattern for notifying a failure.

As described above, when the special variable effect is executed, a plurality of episode effects are executed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, at the start of the episode production, the remaining time until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) before the end of the second special 2 fluctuation is calculated, and the episode production that ends within this remaining time is calculated. A maximum number of times is determined. In other words, the episode production is executed within a range that can be reliably completed during the second Special 2 variation. Then, the time remaining when all the episode effects are finished is absorbed by the pseudo-fluctuation effect.

As described above, in the embodiment, after the 10R probability variable big role game, two special 2 fluctuations are lost, and there are two or more special 1 suspensions at the start of the second special 2 fluctuation, special fluctuation production is determined in advance as an execution condition for When this execution condition is established, the variable time is 10 minutes, but the variable time of 10 minutes can be determined in the high probability game state (specific state and probability variable state) set after the 10R probability variable big role game. The longest time.

That is, the special variable effect has the longest execution time among the variable effects that can be executed in the predetermined state (high probability game state) when the execution condition is established in the predetermined state (high probability game state). In such a special variable performance, by making the episode performance at least partly common to the performance executed during the 10R variable big role game, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of premium and make the player feel tired. is wiped out, and the desire to play can be improved.

It should be noted that here, the episode effects of Chapters 1 to 5 are sequentially executed, and the episode effects of Chapter 6 are not executed. This is because the episode effect of Chapter 6 is positioned as a premiere effect, and is a series of effects continuing from the variable effect of the big win. In this way, in the special variable production, the episode production of Chapter 6 is not executed, so that the premium feeling of the episode production of Chapter 6 is not lowered. However, in the special variation production, the episode production of Chapter 6 may be executed.

Also, in the embodiment, the episode effects from chapters 1 to 5 are sequentially executed, but the order of execution may be determined at random, for example. Also, for example, the episode effects may be executed in order from the next chapter of the episode effects executed during the 10R probability variable big role game.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, a completely common episode effect is executed during the 10R probability variable big role game and the special variation production, but for example, part of the episode production executed during the 10R probability variable big role game may be cut, or part or all of the playback speed or playback time may be different between the two. Also, here, in the special variation production, the episode production is executed, but in the special fluctuation production, at least a part of any specific production executed during the 10R probability variable big role game or other big role game , and the specific contents thereof are not particularly limited.

Also, in the embodiment, in the special variable effect, the effect image common to the specific effect (episode effect) executed during the 10R probability variable big role game is displayed on the image display section (main effect display section 200a). However, for example, in the special variation effect, an image different from the episode effect may be displayed, and only the BGM may be common to the episode effect.

FIG. 107(a) is a diagram for explaining the third effect system, and FIG. 107(b) is a diagram for explaining the fourth effect system. When the first special 2 variation is a loss, the second special 2 variation is a jackpot, and a non-electrical bonus period is provided after the 10R probability variable big role game, the performance system becomes the third performance system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107(a), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variable big role game, and after the ending period elapses, the special 2 variation is executed twice. Of these two special 2 fluctuations, in the first special 2 fluctuation, the winning pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 162, and in the second special 2 fluctuation, the jackpot pattern is finally displayed. Stop display is performed on the second special symbol display 162 . Also, during the first special 2 variation, the variation display of the normal symbols is started, and after the winning symbols are displayed, the auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of open games are executed through the opening period. This auxiliary game ends during special 2 fluctuation regardless of the start timing of the fluctuation display of normal symbols.

In the third effect system, a round effect provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R probability variable big role game. Then, with the start of the 10th round game, the direction instruction effect is executed, and with the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the occurrence effect is executed. After that, from the start of the first set of open games to the end of the tenth set of open games, the winning effect is executed, and from the end of the tenth set of open games to the end of the second special 2 variation, continuous So production is executed. In addition, in the third effect system, similarly to the first effect system, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are executed. In other words, the third effect system is different from the first effect system in that the continuous resort effect is executed instead of the ending effect, and all other effects are the same.

FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining an example of the contents of the third effect system. As shown in FIGS. 108(a) to (g), in the third effect system, similarly to the first effect system, the round effect, the direction instruction effect, the generation effect, the winning effect, the number of rounds display effect, and the total number of wins are reported. A performance is performed. Then, when the 10th set of open game ends, as shown in FIG. 108(i), after the message "steal the jackpot" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c with the number 7 are displayed as shown in FIG. 108(i). The display is stopped, and the player is notified of the winning of the jackpot.

Here, when the second special 2 variation ends, the second 10R probability variable big role game is started. During the second 10R probability variable big role game, round production, direction instruction production, round number display production and total acquisition number notification production are executed in the same way as the first 10R probability variable big role game. In addition, even after the second 10R probability variable big role game ends, a non-electrical bonus period can be provided. In this way, when the jackpot is won in the second special 2 variation, the first 10R probability variable big role game, the first non-electric bonus period, the second 10R probability variable big role game, and the second non-electric bonus period are consecutive. .

Here, at the start of the second 10R probability variable big role game, the number of round games obtained by adding "1" to the final number of round games in the first non-electrical bonus period is displayed by the round number display effect. Further, at the start of the second 10R probability variable big role game, the total number of winnings displayed at the end of the first non-electrical bonus period is displayed by the total number of winnings notification effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(b), after the 10R probability variable big role game, the first special 2 variation is a loss, the second special 2 variation is a jackpot, and the non-electric bonus period is not given , the effect system becomes the fourth effect system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107(b), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variable big role game, and after the ending period elapses, the special 2 variation is executed twice. Of these two special 2 fluctuations, in the first special 2 fluctuation, the winning pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 162, and in the second special 2 fluctuation, the jackpot pattern is finally displayed. Stop display is performed on the second special symbol display 162 . Further, if the variation display of normal symbols is not started during the first special 2 variation, 10 sets of open games are not executed, and the non-electrical bonus period is not provided.

Also in the fourth effect system, a round effect provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R variable big role game, and a direction instruction effect is executed with the start of the 10th round game. be. The direction indication effect is continuously executed until the start of the second special 2 variation.

Then, with the start of the second special 2 variation, the ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance is completed, the mode transition performance is executed, and then the pseudo-variation performance is executed. In this pseudo-fluctuation performance, performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode before a predetermined time when the second special 2 variation ends, and thereafter, the role performance is executed in which the performance accessory device 202 operates. be done. That is, the content of the fourth effect system is the same as that of the second effect system until the middle of the pseudo-fluctuation effect.

FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining an example of the contents of the fourth effect system. As shown in FIGS. 109(a) to (d), in the fourth effect system, similarly to the second effect system, a direction instruction effect, an ending effect, a mode transition effect, and a pseudo-fluctuation effect are executed. Then, in the pseudo-fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 109(e), in the last pseudo-fluctuation, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode. After that, a role product effect is executed in which a predetermined accessory device 202 operates from the initial position to, for example, a movable position located in front of the main effect display unit 200a, and after the accessory device 202 returns to the initial position, The second Special 2 variation ends.

Thus, by providing the fourth performance system for executing the pseudo-fluctuation performance like the second performance system, there is a possibility that the winning of the jackpot is reported even during the pseudo-fluctuation performance. As a result, the player can have a sense of anticipation even for the pseudo-fluctuation effect, and fatigue can be reduced.

FIG. 110(a) is a diagram for explaining the fifth effect system, and FIG. 110(b) is a diagram for explaining the sixth effect system. After the 10R probability variable big role game, when the first special 2 variation is a jackpot and a non-electrical bonus period is provided, the presentation system becomes the fifth presentation system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variable big role game, and after the ending period elapses, the first special 2 variation is executed. In this first special 2 variation, finally the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 162 .

Also, during the first special 2 variation, the variation display of the normal symbols is started, and after the winning symbols are displayed, the auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of open games are executed through the opening period. In this case, the auxiliary game ends during the second 10R probability variable big role game. Here, the auxiliary game is generally designed to end during the 3rd to 5th round games.

In the fifth effect system, the round effect is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 1st 10R variable big role game, and the direction instruction effect is executed with the start of the 10th round game. In addition, with the start of the variable display of normal symbols, a second occurrence effect different from the above-described occurrence effect is executed. After that, a special effect is executed from the start of the first round game in the second 10R probability variable big role game to the end of the ninth round game.

Incidentally, the special effect may be executed with the start of the first set of open games. Then, during the tenth round game in the second 10R probability variable big role game, the direction instruction effect is executed, and thereafter, the effect is executed in the same manner as described above. In addition, during the second 10R probability variable big role game, the total acquisition number notification effect is executed.

FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining an example of the contents of the fifth effect system. As shown in FIGS. 111 (a) to (c), in the fifth production system, as in the first production system, during the first 10R probability variable big role game, round production, direction instruction production, round number display production and total Acquisition number notification effect is executed. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbols is started during the first special 2 variation, the second generation effect is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 111(d), "Festival opening" is displayed in the main effect display section 200a in the second generated effect.

It should be noted that during the second generation effect, the mini symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the first special 2 variation is completed and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, FIG. 111(e). , a mini-symbol with the number "7" is stopped and displayed. Then, when the first round game is started, a special effect is executed. In this special effect, as shown in FIGS. 111(f) to (h), a special background image is displayed, and the total number of game balls acquired by the player is updated and displayed by the total number of winning notification effect. be.

In this total acquisition number notification effect, the total acquisition number is continuously updated and displayed from the first 10R probability variable big role game. Also, here, the second 10R probability variable big role game and the non-electrical bonus period run concurrently. Therefore, in the total winning number notification effect, the number of winning balls entered into the big winning hole 126 and paid out, and the number of game balls entering the first non-charging winning hole 127a and the second non-charging winning hole 129a. The number of prize balls put out as balls is mixed and counted and displayed. Then, in the tenth round game in the second 10R probability variable big role game, as shown in FIG. 111(i), the direction instruction effect is executed again.

Also, as shown in FIG. 110(b), after the 10R probability variable big role game, when the first special 2 variation is a jackpot and the non-electrical bonus period is not provided, the effect system becomes the sixth effect system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(b), 10 round games are executed in the first 10R probability variable big role game, and after the ending period elapses, the first special 2 variation is executed. In this first special 2 variation, finally the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display device 162, and the second 10R probability variable big role game is executed. However, if the variation display of normal symbols is not started during the first special 2 variation, 10 sets of open games are not executed, and the non-electrical bonus period is not provided.

Also in the sixth production system, during the 1st to 9th round games in the 1st 10R fixed variable big role game, the round production provided for each round game is executed, and with the start of the 10th round game, the direction instruction production is executed. The direction indication performance is continuously executed until the end of the first special 2 variation. Then, when the second 10R probability variable big role game is started, the direction instruction performance is executed again, and thereafter, the performance is executed in the same manner as the first 10R probability variable big role game.

FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect content of the sixth effect system. As shown in FIGS. 112(a) to (c), in the sixth effect system, similarly to the second effect system, the round effect and the direction instruction effect are executed during the first 10R probability variable big role game. The direction indication performance is continuously executed even during the first special 2 variation, and the mini symbols are variably displayed during this special 2 variation. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 and the second 10R probability variable big role game is started, a direction indication effect is executed as shown in FIG. 112(d).

Here, the direction instruction effect executed with the start of the second 10R probability variable big role game is different in display content from the direction instruction effect executed during the tenth round game in the first 10R probability variable big role game. there is However, the direction indication effect executed during the tenth round game in the first 10R probability variable big role game may be continued until the second 10R probability variable big role game. Also, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the mini symbol with the number "7" is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(e), during the first round game in the second 10R probability variable big role game, the round effect, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are executed. Here, at the start of the second 10R probability variable big role game, the number of round games and the total number of acquisitions are reset, but even if the number of round games and the total number of acquisitions counted during the first 10R probability variable big role game are taken over good.

Next, processing in the effect control board 330 for executing the effect related to the effect system described above will be described. In addition, below, the processing related to the above effect system will be described, and the description of the other processing and the same processing as the above reference example of effect will be omitted. Also, in the following description, the order of the actual processing may differ from that of the actual processing in order to facilitate understanding.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart illustrating sub timer interrupt processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. The sub-timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment is executed instead of the sub-timer interrupt processing according to the above reference example of effect. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, counter update processing (S1150) and addition processing (S1300) are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart illustrating counter update processing (S1150) in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1150-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the 10R probability variable big winning game is in progress. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the 10R probability variable big role game, the process is moved to step S1150-3, and when it is determined that it is not in the 10R probability variable big role game, the process is moved to step S1150-13.

(Step S1150-3)
The sub CPU 330 a determines whether a game ball has entered the big winning hole 126 . As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 126, the process is shifted to step S1150-5, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the big winning opening 126, step S1150. -9 is processed.

(Step S1150-5)
The sub CPU 330a adds "15" to the counter value C2 of the second counter.

(Step S1150-7)
The sub CPU 330a updates the total winning number displayed on the main effect display section 200a to the counter value C2 of the second counter.

(Step S1150-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the game ball has entered a winning opening other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electric winning opening. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the other winning opening, the process is shifted to step S1150-11, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the other winning opening, the End the counter update process.

(Step S1150-11)
The sub CPU 330a updates (adds) the counter value C1 of the first counter by the number of prize balls to be paid out.

(Step S1150-13)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is during the non-electrical bonus period. As a result, when it is determined that the non-electrical bonus period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S1150-15, and when it is determined that the non-electrical bonus period is not in effect, the counter updating process is terminated.

(Step S1150-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the game ball has entered a winning opening other than the big winning opening 126 and the non-electric winning opening. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the other winning opening, the process is shifted to step S1150-17, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the other winning opening, step The process moves to S1150-19.

(Step S1150-17)
The sub CPU 330a updates (adds) the counter value C1 of the first counter by the number of prize balls to be paid out.

(Step S1150-19)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not a game ball enters a non-electrical winning hole. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the non-electrical winning opening, the process is shifted to step S1150-21, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the non-electrical winning opening, the relevant End the counter update process.

(Step S1150-21)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the counter value C1 of the first counter is 5 or more. As a result, when it is determined that C1≧5, the process proceeds to step S1150-23, and when it is determined that C1≧5 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1150-27.

(Step S1150-23)
The sub CPU 330a adds "19" to the counter value C2 of the second counter.

(Step S1150-25)
The sub CPU 330a subtracts "5" from the counter value C1 of the first counter.

(Step S1150-27)
The sub CPU 330a adds "14" to the counter value C2 of the second counter.

(Step S1150-29)
The sub CPU 330a updates the total winning number displayed on the main effect display section 200a to the counter value C2 of the second counter, and terminates the counter updating process.

Although detailed description is omitted, the counter value C1 of the first counter and the counter value C2 of the second counter are reset at the end of the non-electrical bonus period.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart for explaining variation pattern command reception processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The variation pattern command reception process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the variation pattern command reception process according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. Here, in the main control board 300, the case where the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special 2 variation is received will be described, and the case where the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special 1 variation will be described. omitted. Also, here, the case where the variation pattern command is received after the 10R probability variable big role game will be described.

(Step S1220-1)
The sub CPU 330a increments a variation number counter that counts the number of special 2 variations after the 10R probability variation big winning game.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the number of variations updated in step S1220-1 is 3 or more, that is, whether it is time to start special 2 variation after the 3rd time after the 10R probability variation big role game. As a result, when it is determined that the number of times of variation is 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S1220-5, and when it is determined that the number of times of variation is not 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S1220-7.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a executes normal variation effect determination processing for determining the execution pattern of the normal variation effect based on the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a executes mini-symbol variation processing for starting variable display of mini-symbols.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the number of variations updated in step S1220-1 is 1, that is, whether it is time to start the first special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation big role game. As a result, if it is determined that the number of variations is 1, the process proceeds to step S1220-11, and if it is determined that the number of variations is not 1, the process proceeds to step S1220-15.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the result of the first special 2 variation, that is, the result of the first big win lottery is a big win. As a result, if it is determined to be a big win, the process moves to step S1220-13, and if it is determined not to be a big win, the process moves to step S1220-33.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the continuous winning flag indicating that the result of the first special 2 variation is a big win after the 10R probability variable big win game. Although detailed description is omitted, the continuous winning flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second 10R probability variable big role game.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the result of the second special 2 variation, that is, the result of the second big win lottery is a big win. As a result, when it is determined to be a big hit, the process moves to step S1220-27, and when it is determined not to be a big win, the process moves to step S1220-17.

(Step S1220-17)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, although it will be described later in detail, the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on when the normal pattern fluctuation display is started during the first special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probability variation big role game. When it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on, the process is moved to step S1220-19, and when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S1220-21.

(Step S1220-19)
The sub CPU 330a performs a first effect system execution process for executing the effect of the first effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-described first effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-21)
The sub CPU 330a performs second effect system execution processing for executing the effect of the second effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-described second effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-23)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the received variation pattern command is a special variation command corresponding to a variation time of 10 minutes. As a result, when it is determined that it is a special variation command, the process proceeds to step S1220-25, and when it is determined that it is not a special variation command, the process proceeds to step S1220-33.

(Step S1220-25)
The sub CPU 330a performs a special variation effect execution process for executing a special variation effect. Here, the execution pattern of the episode effect to be executed during the second special 2 variation is determined, and processing for starting the episode effect of the determined execution pattern is performed.

(Step S1220-27)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on, the process is moved to step S1220-29, and when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S1220-31. .

(Step S1220-29)
The sub CPU 330a performs a third effect system execution process for executing the effect of the third effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-described third effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-31)
The sub CPU 330a performs fourth effect system execution processing for executing the effect of the fourth effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-described fourth effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-33)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data in the timetable based on the determinations made in the above steps, and terminates the variation pattern command reception process. Based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, etc. Production execution control is performed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol designation command reception processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The normal design designation command is set at step S710-19 of the normal design change waiting process, and then transmitted at step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1230-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the current game state is the specific state. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the specific state, the process is moved to step S1230-3, and when it is determined that it is not in the specific state, the normal symbol designation command reception process ends.

(Step S1230-3)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the normal pattern fluctuation flag. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the normal figure fluctuation flag is turned off at the end of the second special 2 fluctuation, or at the end of the second 10R probability variable big role game, for example, after the 10R probability variable big role game.

(Step S1230-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the consecutive winning flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the consecutive winning flag is turned on, the process moves to step S1230-7, and when it is determined that the consecutive winning flag is not turned on, the process moves to step S1230-9.

(Step S1230-7)
The sub CPU 330a performs the fifth effect system execution process for executing the effect of the fifth effect system, and ends the normal symbol designation command reception process. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-described fifth effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1230-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs the occurrence effect execution process for executing the above-described occurrence effect, and ends the normal symbol designation command reception process.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart for explaining opening designation command reception processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The opening designation command is set at step S630-21 of the special symbol stop symbol display process, and then transmitted at step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1240-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the consecutive winning flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the consecutive winning flag is turned on, the processing is moved to step S1240-3, and when it is determined that the consecutive winning flag is not turned on, the opening designation command reception processing is terminated. do.

(Step S1240-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on, the process is moved to step S1240-5, and when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is not turned on, the opening designation command reception process exit.

(Step S1240-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs the sixth effect system execution process for executing the effect of the sixth effect system, and ends the opening designation command reception process. Here, processing is performed for executing each of the effects constituting the sixth effect system described above at a preset opportunity and timing. Although detailed description is omitted, the continuous winning flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second 10R probability variable big role game.

FIG. 118 is a flow chart for explaining a special winning opening designation command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. The command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process after being set in step S640-5 of the big winning opening pre-opening process.

(Step S1250-1)
The sub CPU 330a updates a round number counter that counts the number of rounds.

(Step S1250-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the consecutive winning flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the continuous winning flag is turned on, the process is moved to step S1250-5, and when it is determined that the continuous winning flag is not turned on, the process is moved to step S1250-15. .

(Step S1250-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is turned on, the process is moved to step S1250-7, and when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1250-15. to move.

(Step S1250-7)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received large winning opening designation command and determines whether it is the start of the first round game. As a result, when it is determined that the first round game is started, the process is moved to step S1250-9, and when it is determined that the first round game is not started, the process is moved to step S1250-11. .

(Step S1250-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a special effect execution process for executing a special effect, and ends the special winning opening designation command reception process.

(Step S1250-11)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received large winning opening designation command and determines whether the tenth round game is to start. As a result, when it is determined that the 10th round game is started, the process is moved to step S1250-13, and when it is determined that the 10th round game is not started, the big winning opening designation command End the reception process.

(Step S1250-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a direction instruction effect execution process for executing a direction instruction effect, and ends the special winning opening designation command reception process.

(Step S1250-15)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received large winning opening designation command and determines whether the tenth round game is to start. As a result, when it is determined that the 10th round game is started, the process proceeds to step S1250-17, and when it is determined that the 10th round game is not started, the process proceeds to step S1250-19. Move.

(Step S1250-17)
The sub CPU 330a performs a direction instruction effect execution process for executing a direction instruction effect.

(Step S1250-19)
The sub CPU 330a performs a round effect execution process for executing a round effect corresponding to the number of round games played. Here, if it is the start of the first round game, the episode effect to be executed is determined, and among the episode effects decided to be executed, an image corresponding to the first round game is displayed, or BGM is displayed. Perform processing such as starting output.

(Step S1250-21)
The sub CPU 330a updates the number of round games displayed by the number-of-rounds display effect to the number of rounds updated in step S1250-1, and ends the special winning opening designation command reception process.

FIG. 119 is a flow chart for explaining a general power disconnect designation command reception process in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. General electrical opening designation command, after being set in step S741-13 of normal electric accessories winning opening opening/closing switching process, is transmitted in step S100-65 of CPU initialization process.

(Step S1260-1)
The sub CPU 330a increments an open game number counter that counts the number of times the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened in one auxiliary game.

(Step S1260-3)
The sub CPU 330a confirms the open game number counter updated in step S1260-1, and determines whether the first set of open games is started. As a result, when it is determined that the first set of open games is started, the process is moved to step S1260-5, and when it is determined that the first set of open games is not started, the general electric open designation End command reception processing.

(Step S1260-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the consecutive winning flag is turned on. As a result, if the consecutive winning flag is turned on, the general electric power opening specifying command reception process is terminated, and if the consecutive winning flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1260-7.

(Step S1260-7)
The sub CPU 330a performs a winning effect execution process for executing a winning effect, and ends the general electric power opening designation command reception process.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart for explaining normal power closing designation command reception processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. General electricity closing designation command, after being set in step S741-17 of normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process, is transmitted in step S100-65 of CPU initialization process.

(Step S1270-1)
The sub CPU 330 a sets a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time to a determination timer that counts the waiting time until it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the normal electric winning hole 123 . Here, the predetermined time is the time required for the game ball entering the normal electric winning hole 123 to be reliably detected by the second starting hole detection switch 122s. Note that the timer value of the judgment timer is decremented in the timer update process (S1100-5) of the sub timer interrupt process.

(Step S1270-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the number-of-opened-games counter is 10 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the open game number counter is 10 or more, the process is moved to step S1270-5, and when it is determined that the open game number counter is not 10 or more, the general electric power closing designation command is received. End the process.

(Step S1270-5)
The sub CPU 330a resets (sets to 0) the number-of-opened-games counter, and terminates the normal electric closing designation command reception process.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart for explaining the additional processing (S1300) in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1300-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the consecutive winning flag is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the consecutive winning flag is turned on, the additional processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the consecutive winning flag is not turned on, the processing is moved to step S1300-3.

(Step S1300-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the determination timer has been updated from 1 to 0 in the timer update process (S1100-5). As a result, if it is determined that the value has been updated from 1 to 0, the process proceeds to step S1300-5, and if it is determined that the value has not been updated from 1 to 0, the process proceeds to step S1300-25.

(Step S1300-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 in the open game. Although detailed description is omitted, when the second starting opening detection switch 122s provided in the upper second starting opening 122 detects a game ball, a winning command is transmitted to the sub control board 330. FIG. Then, in the sub-control board 330, when a winning command is received from the start of one set of open games until the determination timer reaches 0, the winning flag is turned on. Here, by loading the winning flag, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the normal electric winning opening 123 . If it is determined that the game ball has entered, the process moves to step S1300-7, and if it is determined that the game ball has not entered, the process moves to step S1300-15. In addition, when it is determined that the game ball has entered, the winning flag is turned off.

(Step S1300-7)
The sub CPU 330a increments the round number counter. The round number counter updated here is the same as the round number counter updated in step S1250-1. That is, the common round number counter is updated at the start of the round game in the 10R probability variable big role game and when the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 in one set of open game. As a result, the number of round games of the 10R probability variable big role game and the number of open games in which the game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 123 are added up and counted.

(Step S1300-9)
The sub CPU 330a updates the number of round games displayed in the round number display effect to the number of rounds updated in step S1300-7.

(Step S1300-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the tenth set of open games is in progress, based on the counter value of the open game number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the tenth set of open games is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1300-13, and when it is determined that the tenth set of open games is not in progress, the additional processing is terminated.

(Step S1300-13)
The sub CPU 330a sets a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time to the ending effect standby timer, and terminates the additional process. The predetermined time is slightly longer than the interval time (5 seconds). Also, the timer value of the ending effect standby timer is subtracted in the timer update process (S1100-5).

(Step S1300-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the tenth set of open games is in progress, based on the counter value of the open game number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the tenth set of open games is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1300-19, and when it is determined that the tenth set of open games is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1300-17. Move.

(Step S1300-17)
The sub CPU 330a performs an instruction effect execution process for executing an instruction effect, and ends the additional process.

(Step S1300-19)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the second Special 2 variation is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined to be a big win, the process moves to step S1300-21, and if it is determined not to be a big win, the process moves to step S1300-23.

(Step S1300-21)
The sub CPU 330a performs a multi-station production execution process for executing a multi-station production, and ends the addition process.

(Step S1300-23)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing for executing the ending effect and the background effect, and ends the additional processing.

(Step S1300-25)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the ending effect standby timer has been updated from 1 to 0 in the timer update process (S1100-5). As a result, if it is determined that the value has been updated from 1 to 0, the process proceeds to step S1300-23, and if it is determined that the value has not been updated from 1 to 0, the addition processing is terminated.

While the preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such embodiments. It is obvious that a person skilled in the art can conceive of various modifications or modifications within the scope of the claims, and it should be understood that these also belong to the technical scope of the present invention. be done.

In the above embodiment, the case of a so-called simultaneous spinning machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to so-called first-class gaming machines, second-class gaming machines, and first-class and second-class mixing machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game state is provided by a combination of the high probability game state and the low probability game state, the time saving game state and the non-time saving game state, but the game state is not limited to this. Also, the playability according to the above-described embodiment is merely an example, and the design of the playability can be changed as appropriate.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the normal game state, non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state are provided, but the game ball entering the variable start port rather than the non-time-saving game state There may be only one state in which the Also, the A time-saving gaming state may be set so as not to win a win. Furthermore, in the normal game, execution or non-execution of the auxiliary game may be determined according to the game state without performing the normal drawing lottery. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 in the B time-saving game state, the auxiliary game is executed without obtaining a random number, and in the other normal game state, the auxiliary game is not executed. good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the variable probability region 140a, the normal game state is set to the A time-saving game state. However, for a predetermined jackpot pattern, even when the game ball does not enter the probability variable region 140a, the normal game state may be set to the B time-saving game state. For example, when the special symbol D is determined, regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability area 140a, the normal game state may be set to the B time saving game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, by setting the second fluctuation time in the specific state to a long time, after the result of the normal drawing lottery is derived in the specific state, before the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 starts, the game The state can be changed from a specific state to another game state. However, for example, the fluctuation time after the first time or the third time in the specific state may be set longer than the time from the start to the end of opening the normal electric prize winning opening 123 . In this way, after the end of the big win game, by setting the predetermined number of fluctuation times longer than the time from the start to the end of opening the normal electric prize winning port 123, before the start of opening the normal electric prize winning port 123, A game state can be changed from a specific state to another game state.

Also, for example, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time saving game state (at the time of the jackpot and at the time of losing) is longer than the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal pattern to the start of opening the normal electric winning opening 123 May be set. In this case, when the first special 2 variation in the B time-saving gaming state is a big win, it is possible to notify the winning of the big win prior to the non-electrical bonus. In this case, the non-electronic bonus does not hinder the notification of the winning of the jackpot, and is effective when the notification of winning the jackpot with higher profit is prioritized. Also, according to the above settings, at least before the start of the non-electric bonus, the special 2 fluctuation can be executed twice, so even if the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state does not include the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the non- The normal game state at the start of the electric bonus can be made into a non-time-saving game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base from becoming too high during the time-saving game state due to the non-electrical bonus, as in the above embodiment.

Also, for example, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time-saving gaming state (at the time of the jackpot and at the time of losing), from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display in the non-time-saving gaming state to the end of opening the normal electric winning opening 123 may be set longer than the time of If the time from the start of the normal symbol variation display in the non-time-saving game state to the start of the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is longer than the variation time of the first special 2 variation in the B time-saving game state, the big role game If you win the normal drawing lottery just before the end of , the fluctuation display of the next normal pattern will not start during the B time-saving game state, and the special 2 fluctuation will be started twice and will be changed from the B time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state. After that, there is a possibility that the variable display of the next normal symbol will be started. In this case, since the variable display of normal symbols is not started in the B time-saving gaming state, the non-electrical bonus cannot be obtained. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time-saving gaming state (at the time of the jackpot and at the time of losing), from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal pattern in the non-time-saving gaming state, the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 By setting longer than the time until, it is possible to start the variable display of normal symbols during the B time-saving game state.

Moreover, the presentation in the above embodiment is merely an example, and needless to say, the design can be changed as appropriate.

Also, in the above embodiment, the simultaneous spinning machine has been described, but any of winning order, special 2 priority, and special 1 priority may be used.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, a case in which six levels of setting values are provided has been described, but setting values may not be provided, and the number of setting values is not particularly limited. Also, in the above embodiment, the odds of winning the jackpot are different depending on the set value. However, what differs depending on the set value is not limited to this.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b are provided on the game board 108 as areas in which game balls can be separately hit has been described. However, the board configuration of the game board 108 is not limited to this, and only one game area may be provided.

The payout control board 310 corresponds to payout control means of the present invention.
Further, the sub CPU 330a that executes the counter updating process (S1150) corresponds to the counter updating means of the present invention.
Further, the sub CPU 330a that executes the processes of steps S1150-7 and S1150-29 corresponds to the notification means of the present invention.

100 game machine 108 game board 116 game area 118 general winning opening (first winning area)
120 1st starting point (first winning area)
122 Second start gate (first winning area)
126 Grand Prize Opening (Second Prize Winning Area)
127a 1st non-electric prize gate (third prize area)
129a 2nd non-electric prize gate (3rd prize area)
310 payout control board (payout control means)
330 sub-control board 330a sub-CPU
330b sub ROM
330c sub-RAM

Claims (3)

a game board on which a game area where game balls flow down is formed;
A first winning area, a second winning area and a third winning area provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
A first number of game balls are paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the first prize winning area, and a second number of game balls are paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the second prize winning area, Payout control means for paying out a third number of game balls based on the entry of game balls into the third winning area;
The first stored value is updated by the first number based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning area, and the second stored value is updated based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning area. is updated by the second number, and based on the entry of the game ball into the third winning area, the second stored value is within the range of the first stored value to the third number updating means for updating by a number obtained by adding a specific number;
reporting means for reporting the number of game balls to be paid out based on the second stored value;
A game machine with The update means is
when updating the second stored value based on the entry of the game ball into the third winning area, subtracting the specific number from the first stored value;
The game machine according to claim 1. A predetermined game that allows game balls to enter the first winning area and the second winning area, and a specific game that allows game balls to enter at least the third winning area are executed. ,
The specific game is started after the predetermined game,
The game machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images